diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/boot/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/boot/chapter.sgml
index d4d384f656..b5b7987d9d 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/boot/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/boot/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,690 +1,690 @@
The FreeBSD Booting ProcessSynopsisbootingbootstrapThe process of starting a computer and loading the operating system
is referred to as the bootstrap process, or simply
booting. FreeBSD's boot process provides a great deal of
flexibility in customizing what happens when you start the system,
allowing you to select from different operating systems installed on the
same computer, or even different versions of the same operating system
or installed kernel.This chapter details the configuration options you can set and how
to customize the FreeBSD boot process. This includes everything that
happens until the FreeBSD kernel has started, probed for devices, and
started &man.init.8;. If you are not quite sure when this happens, it
occurs when the text color changes from bright white to grey.After reading this chapter, you will know:What the components of the FreeBSD bootstrap system are, and how
they interact.The options you can give to the components in the FreeBSD
bootstrap to control the boot process.x86 onlyThis chapter only describes the boot process for FreeBSD running
on Intel x86 systems.The Booting ProblemTurning on a computer and starting the operating system poses an
interesting dilemma. By definition, the computer does not know how to
do anything until the operating system is started. This includes
running programs from the disk. So if the computer can not run a
program from the disk without the operating system, and the operating
system programs are on the disk, how is the operating system
started?This problem parallels one in the book The Adventures of
Baron Munchausen. A character had fallen part way down a
manhole, and pulled himself out by grabbing his bootstraps, and
lifting. In the early days of computing the term
bootstrap was applied to the mechanism used to
load the operating system, which has become shortened to
booting.On x86 hardware the Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) is responsible
for loading the operating system. To do this, the BIOS looks on the
hard disk for the Master Boot Record (MBR), which must be located on a
specific place on the disk. The BIOS has enough knowledge to load and
run the MBR, and assumes that the MBR can then carry out the rest of the
tasks involved in loading the operating system.BIOSBasic Input/Output SystemIf you only have one operating system installed on your disks then
the standard MBR will suffice. This MBR searches for the first bootable
slice on the disk, and then runs the code on that slice to load the
remainder of the operating system.If you have installed multiple operating systems on your disks then
you can install a different MBR, one that can display a list of
different operating systems, and allows you to choose the one to boot
from. FreeBSD comes with one such MBR which can be installed, and other
operating system vendors also provide alternative MBRs.The remainder of the FreeBSD bootstrap system is divided into three
stages. The first stage is run by the MBR, which knows just enough to
get the computer into a specific state and run the second stage. The
second stage can do a little bit more, before running the third stage.
The third stage finishes the task of loading the operating system. The
work is split into these three stages because the PC standards put
limits on the size of the programs that can be run at stages one and
two. Chaining the tasks together allows FreeBSD to provide a more
flexible loader.kernelinitThe kernel is then started and it begins to probe for devices
and initialize them for use. Once the kernel boot
process is finished, the kernel passes control to the user process
&man.init.8;, which then makes sure the disks are in a usable state.
&man.init.8; then starts the user-level resource configuration which
mounts filesystems, sets up network cards to communicate on the
network, and generally starts all the processes that usually
are run on a FreeBSD system at startup.The MBR, and Boot Stages One, Two, and ThreeMBR, /boot/boot0Master Boot Record (MBR)The FreeBSD MBR is located in /boot/boot0.
This is a copy of the MBR, as the real MBR must
be placed on a special part of the disk, outside the FreeBSD
area.boot0 is very simple, since the
program in the MBR can only be 512 bytes in
size. If you have installed the FreeBSD MBR and have installed
multiple operating systems on your hard disks then you will see a
display similar to this one at boot time.boot0 ScreenshotF1 DOS
F2 FreeBSD
F3 Linux
F4 ??
F5 Drive 1
Default: F2Other operating systems, in particular Windows 95, have been known
to overwrite an existing MBR with their own. If this happens to you,
or you want to replace your existing MBR with the FreeBSD MBR then use
the following command.&prompt.root; fdisk -B -b /boot/boot0 deviceWhere device is the device that you
boot from, such as ad0 for the first IDE
disk, ad2 for the first IDE disk on a second
IDE controller, da0 for the first SCSI disk,
and so on.If you are a Linux user, however, and prefer that
LILO control the boot process, you can
edit the /etc/lilo.conf file for FreeBSD, or
select
during the FreeBSD installation process. If you have installed the
- the FreeBSD boot manager, you can boot back into Linux and modify the
+ FreeBSD boot manager, you can boot back into Linux and modify the
LILO configuration file
/etc/lilo.conf and add the following
option:other=/dev/hdXY
table=/dev/hdb
loader=/boot/chain.b
label=FreeBSDwhich will permit the booting of FreeBSD and Linux via
LILO. In our example, we use
XY to determine drive number and
partition. If you are using a SCSI drive, you
will want to change /dev/hdXY to read
something similar to /dev/sdXY, which
again uses the XY syntax. The
can be omitted if you have
both operating systems on the same drive. You can now run
/sbin/lilo -v to commit your new changes to the
system, this should be verified with screen messages.Stage One, /boot/boot1, and Stage Two,
/boot/boot2Conceptually the first and second stages are part of the same
program, on the same area of the disk. Because of space constraints
they have been split into two, but you would always install them
together.They are found on the boot sector of
the boot slice, which is where boot0, or any other program on the
MBR expects to find the program to run to
continue the boot process. The files in the
/boot directory are copies of the real files,
which are stored outside of the FreeBSD filesystem.boot1 is very simple, since it too
can only be 512 bytes
in size, and knows just enough about the FreeBSD
disklabel, which stores information
about the slice, to find and execute boot2.boot2 is slightly more sophisticated, and understands
the FreeBSD filesystem enough to find files on it, and can
provide a simple interface to choose the kernel or loader to
run.Since the loader is
much more sophisticated, and provides a nice easy-to-use
boot configuration, boot2 usually runs
it, but previously it
was tasked to run the kernel directly.boot2 Screenshot>> FreeBSD/i386 BOOT
Default: 0:ad(0,a)/kernel
boot:If you ever need to replace the installed
boot1 and boot2 use
&man.disklabel.8;.&prompt.root; disklabel -B disksliceWhere diskslice is the disk and slice
you boot from, such as ad0s1 for the first
slice on the first IDE disk.Dangerously Dedicated ModeIf you use just the disk name, such as
ad0, in the &man.disklabel.8; command you
will create a dangerously dedicated disk, without slices. This is
almost certainly not what you want to do, so make sure you double
check the &man.disklabel.8; command before you press
Return.Stage Three, /boot/loaderboot-loaderThe loader is the final stage of the three-stage
bootstrap, and is located on the filesystem, usually as
/boot/loader.The loader is intended as a user-friendly method for
configuration, using an easy-to-use built-in command set,
backed up by a more powerful interpreter, with a more complex
command set.Loader Program FlowDuring initialization, the loader will probe for a
console and for disks, and figure out what disk it is
booting from. It will set variables accordingly, and an
interpreter is started where user commands can be passed from
a script or interactively.loaderloader configurationThe loader will then read
/boot/loader.rc, which by default reads
in /boot/defaults/loader.conf which
sets reasonable defaults for variables and reads
/boot/loader.conf for local changes to
those variables. loader.rc then acts
on these variables, loading whichever modules and kernel are
selected.Finally, by default, the loader issues a 10 second wait
for key presses, and boots the kernel if it is not interrupted.
If interrupted, the user is presented with a prompt which
understands the easy-to-use command set, where the user may
adjust variables, unload all modules, load modules, and then
finally boot or reboot.Loader Built-In CommandsThese are the most commonly used loader commands. For a
complete discussion of all available commands, please see
&man.loader.8;autoboot secondsProceeds to boot the kernel if not interrupted
within the time span given, in seconds. It displays a
countdown, and the default time span is 10
seconds.boot
-optionskernelnameImmediately proceeds to boot the kernel, with the
given options, if any, and with the kernel name given,
if it is.boot-confGoes through the same automatic configuration of
modules based on variables as what happens at boot.
This only makes sense if you use
unload first, and change some
variables, most commonly kernel.help
topicShows help messages read from
/boot/loader.help. If the topic
given is index, then the list of
available topics is given.include filename
…Processes the file with the given filename. The
file is read in, and interpreted line by line. An
error immediately stops the include command.load typefilenameLoads the kernel, kernel module, or file of the
type given, with the filename given. Any arguments
after filename are passed to the file.ls pathDisplays a listing of files in the given path, or
the root directory, if the path is not specified. If
is specified, file sizes will be
shown too.lsdev Lists all of the devices from which it may be
possible to load modules. If is
specified, more details are printed.lsmod Displays loaded modules. If is
specified, more details are shown.more filenameDisplays the files specified, with a pause at each
LINES displayed.rebootImmediately reboots the system.set variableset
variable=valueSets the loader's environment variables.unloadRemoves all loaded modules.Loader ExamplesHere are some practical examples of loader usage.single-user modeTo simply boot your usual kernel, but in single-user
mode:boot -sTo unload your usual kernel and modules, and then
load just your old (or another) kernel:kernel.oldunloadload kernel.oldYou can use kernel.GENERIC to
refer to the generic kernel that comes on the install
disk, or kernel.old to refer to
your previously installed kernel (when you have upgraded
or configured your own kernel, for example).Use the following to load your usual modules with
another kernel:unloadset kernel="kernel.old"boot-confTo load a kernel configuration script (an automated
script which does the things you would normally do in the
kernel boot-time configurator):load -t userconfig_script /boot/kernel.confKernel Interaction During Bootkernelboot interactionOnce the kernel is loaded by either loader (as usual) or boot2 (bypassing the loader), it
examines its boot flags, if any, and adjusts its behavior as
necessary.kernelbootflagsKernel Boot FlagsHere are the more common boot flags:during kernel initialization, ask for the device
to mount as the root filesystem.boot from CDROM.run UserConfig, the boot-time kernel
configuratorboot into single-user modebe more verbose during kernel startupThere are other boot flags, read &man.boot.8; for more
information on them.initInit: Process Control InitializationOnce the kernel has finished booting, it passes control to
the user process init, which is located at
/sbin/init, or the program path specified
in the init_path variable in
loader.Automatic Reboot SequenceThe automatic reboot sequence makes sure that the
filesystems available on the system are consistent. If they
are not, and fsck cannot fix the
inconsistencies, init drops the system
into single-user mode
for the system administrator to take care of the problems
directly.Single-User Modesingle-user modeconsoleThis mode can be reached through the automatic reboot
sequence, or by the user booting with the
option or setting the
boot_single variable in
loader.It can also be reached by calling
shutdown without the reboot
() or halt () options,
from multi-user
mode.If the system console is set
to insecure in /etc/ttys,
then the system prompts for the root password
before initiating single-user mode.An Insecure Console in /etc/ttys# name getty type status comments
#
# If console is marked "insecure", then init will ask for the root password
# when going to single-user mode.
console none unknown off insecureAn insecure console means that you
consider your physical security to the console to be
insecure, and want to make sure only someone who knows the
root password may use single-user mode, and it
does not mean that you want to run your console insecurely. Thus,
if you want security, choose insecure,
not secure.Multi-User Modemulti-user modeIf init finds your filesystems to be
in order, or once the user has finished in single-user mode, the
system enters multi-user mode, in which it starts the
resource configuration of the system.rc filesResource Configuration (rc)The resource configuration system reads in
configuration defaults from
/etc/defaults/rc.conf, and
system-specific details from
/etc/rc.conf, and then proceeds to
mount the system filesystems mentioned in
/etc/fstab, start up networking
services, start up miscellaneous system daemons, and
finally runs the startup scripts of locally installed
packages.The &man.rc.8; manual page is a good reference to the resource
configuration system, as is examining the scripts
themselves.Shutdown SequenceshutdownUpon controlled shutdown, via shutdown,
init will attempt to run the script
/etc/rc.shutdown, and then proceed to send
all processes the TERM signal, and subsequently
the KILL signal to any that do not terminate
timely.
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/install/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/install/chapter.sgml
index 8c79227954..09a5c0eb82 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/install/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/install/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,5620 +1,5620 @@
JimMockRestructured, reorganized, and parts
rewritten by RandyPrattThe sysinstall walkthrough, screenshots, and general
copy by Installing FreeBSDSynopsisinstallationFreeBSD is provided with a text-based, easy to use installation
program called Sysinstall. This is the
default installation program for FreeBSD, although vendors are free to
provide their own installation suite if they wish. This chapter
describes how to use Sysinstall to install
FreeBSD.After reading this chapter, you will know:How to create the FreeBSD installation disks.How FreeBSD refers to, and subdivides, your hard disks.How to start Sysinstall.The questions Sysinstall will ask
you, what they mean, and how to answer them.Before reading this chapter, you should:Read the supported hardware list that shipped with the version
of FreeBSD you are installing, and verify that your hardware is
supported.In general, these installation instructions are written
for i386 (PC compatible) architecture
computers. Where applicable, instructions specific to other
platforms (for example, Alpha) will be listed.Pre-installation TasksInventory Your ComputerBefore installing FreeBSD you should attempt to inventory the
components in your computer. The FreeBSD installation routines will
show you the components (hard disks, network cards, CDROM drives, and
so forth) with their model number and manufacturer. FreeBSD will also
attempt to determine the correct configuration for these devices,
which includes information about IRQ and IO port usage. Due to the
vagaries of PC hardware this process is not always completely
successful, and you may need to correct FreeBSD's determination of
your configuration.If you already have another operating system installed, such as
Windows or Linux, it is a good idea to use the facilities provided
by those operating systems to see how your hardware is already
configured. If you are really not sure what settings an expansion
card is using, you may find it printed on the card itself. Popular IRQ
numbers are 3, 5, and 7, and IO port addresses are normally written as
hexadecimal numbers, such as 0x330.We recommend you print or write down this information before
installing FreeBSD. It may help to use a table, like this:
Sample Device InventoryDevice NameIRQIO port(s)NotesFirst hard diskN/AN/A4GB, made by Seagate, first IDE masterCDROMN/AN/AFirst IDE slaveSecond hard diskN/AN/A2GB, made by IBM, second IDE masterFirst IDE controller140x1f0Network cardN/AN/AIntel 10/100ModemN/AN/A3Com 56K faxmodem, on COM1…
Backup Your DataIf the computer you will be installing FreeBSD on contains
valuable data then ensure you have it backed up, and that you have
tested the backups before installing FreeBSD. The FreeBSD
installation routine will prompt you several times before writing any
data to your disk, but once that process has started it cannot be
undone.Decide Where to Install FreeBSDIf you want FreeBSD to use all your disk, then there is nothing
more to concern yourself with at this point — you can skip to the
next section.However, if you need FreeBSD to co-exist with other operating
systems then you need to have a rough understanding of how data is
laid out on the disk, and how this affects you.Disk Layouts for the i386A PC disk can be divided into discrete chunks. These chunks are
called partitions. By design, the PC only
supports four partitions per disk. These partitions are called
primary partitions. To work around this
limitation and allow more than four partitions, a new partition type
was created, the extended partition. A disk
may contain only one extended partition. Special partitions, called
logical partitions, can be created inside this
extended partition.Each partition has a partition ID, which is
a number used to identify the type of data on the partition. FreeBSD
partitions have the partition ID 165.In general, each operating system that you use will identify
partitions in a particular way. For example, DOS, and its
descendants, like Windows, assign each primary and logical partition a
drive letter, starting with
C:.FreeBSD must be installed into a primary partition. FreeBSD can
keep all its data, including any files that you create, on this one
partition. However, if you have multiple disks, then you can create a
FreeBSD partition on all, or some, of them. When you install FreeBSD,
you must have one partition available. This might be a blank
partition that you have prepared, or it might be an existing partition
that contains data that you no longer care about.If you are already using all the partitions on all your disks, then
you will have to free one of them for FreeBSD using the tools
provided by the other operating systems you use (e.g.,
fdisk on DOS or Windows).If you have a spare partition then you can use that. However, you
may need to shrink one or more of your existing partitions
first.A minimal installation of FreeBSD takes as little as 100MB of disk
space. However, that is a very minimal install,
leaving almost no space for your own files. A more realistic minimum
is 250MB without a graphical environment, and 350MB or more if you
want a graphical user interface. If you intend to install a lot of
third party software as well, then you will need more space.You can use a commercial tool such as Partition
Magic to resize your partitions to make space for
FreeBSD. The tools directory on the CDROM
contains two free software tools which can carry out this task,
FIPS and
PResizer. Documentation for both of these
is in the same directory.Incorrect use of these tools can delete the data on your disk.
Be sure that you have recent, working backups before using
them.Using an existing partition unchangedSuppose that you have a computer with a single 4GB disk that
already has a version of Windows installed, and you have split the
disk into two drive letters, C: and
D:, each of which is 2GB in size. You have
1GB of data on C:, and 0.5GB of data on
D:.This means that your disk has two partitions on it, one per
drive letter. You can copy all your existing data from
D: to C:, which
will free up the second partition, ready for FreeBSD.Shrinking an existing partitionSuppose that you have a computer with a single 4GB disk, that
already has a version of Windows installed. When you installed
Windows you created one large partition, giving you a
C: drive that is 4GB in size. You are
currently using 1.5GB of space, and want FreeBSD to have 2GB of
space.In order to install FreeBSD you will need to either:Backup your Windows data, and then reinstall Windows,
asking for a 2GB partition at install time.Use one of the tools such as Partition
Magic, described above, to shrink your Windows
partition.Disk Layouts for the AlphaAlphaYou will need a dedicated disk for FreeBSD on the
Alpha. It is not possible to share a disk with another
operating system at this time. Depending on the specific
Alpha machine you have, this disk can either be a SCSI disk
or an IDE disk, as long as your machine is capable of
booting from it.Following the conventions of the Digital / Compaq
manuals all SRM input is shown in uppercase. SRM is case
insensitive.To find the names and types of disks in your machine, use
the SHOW DEVICE command from the SRM
console prompt:>>>show device
dka0.0.0.4.0 DKA0 TOSHIBA CD-ROM XM-57 3476
dkc0.0.0.1009.0 DKC0 RZ1BB-BS 0658
dkc100.1.0.1009.0 DKC100 SEAGATE ST34501W 0015
dva0.0.0.0.1 DVA0
ewa0.0.0.3.0 EWA0 00-00-F8-75-6D-01
pkc0.7.0.1009.0 PKC0 SCSI Bus ID 7 5.27
pqa0.0.0.4.0 PQA0 PCI EIDE
pqb0.0.1.4.0 PQB0 PCI EIDEThis example is from a Digital Personal Workstation
433au and shows three disks attached to the machine. The
first is a CDROM drive called DKA0 and
the other two are disks and are called
DKC0 and
DKC100 respectively.Disks with names of the form DKx
are SCSI disks. For example DKA100
refers to a SCSI with SCSI target ID 1 on the first SCSI bus (A),
whereas DKC300 refers to a SCSI disk
with SCSI ID 3 on the third SCSI bus (C). Devicename
PKx refers to the SCSI host bus adapter. As
seen in the SHOW DEVICE output SCSI
CDROM drives are treated as any other SCSI hard disk drive.IDE disks have names similar to DQx,
while PQx is the associated IDE
controller.Collect Your Network Configuration DetailsIf you intend to connect to a network as part of your FreeBSD
installation (for example, if you will be installing from an FTP
site, or an
NFS server), then you need to know your network configuration. You
will be prompted for this information during the installation so that
FreeBSD can connect to the network to complete the install.Connecting to an Ethernet Network, or Cable/DSL ModemIf you connect to an Ethernet network, or you have an Internet
connection via cable or DSL, then you will need the following
information:IP address.IP address of the default gateway.Hostname.DNS server IP addresses.If you do not know this information, then ask your system
administrator or service provider. They may say that this
information is assigned automatically, using
DHCP. If so, make a note of this.Connecting Using a ModemIf you dial up to an ISP using a regular modem then you can
still install FreeBSD over the Internet, it will just take a very
long time.You will need to know:The phone number to dial for your ISP.The COM: port your modem is connected to.The username and password for your ISP account.Check for FreeBSD ErrataAlthough the FreeBSD project strives to ensure that each release
of FreeBSD is as stable as possible, bugs do occasionally creep into
the process. On very rare occasions those bugs affect the
installation process. As these problems are discovered and fixed they
are noted in the FreeBSD Errata, posted on the FreeBSD web site. You
should check the errata before installing to make sure that there are
no late-breaking problems which you should be aware of.Information about all the releases, including the errata for each
release, can be found on the
release
information section of the
FreeBSD web site.Prepare the Boot DiscsFreeBSD can be installed from a number of different media; CDROM,
DVD, FTP (both anonymous and non-anonymous), NFS, tape, or an existing
MS-DOS partition.If you have FreeBSD on CDROM or DVD, and your computer allows
you to boot from the CDROM or DVD (typically a BIOS option called
Boot Order or similar) then you can skip this
section. The FreeBSD CDROM and DVD images are bootable and can be
used to install FreeBSD without any other special
preparation.The FreeBSD installation process is started by booting your
computer into the FreeBSD installer—it is not a program you run
within another operating system. To do this, you must create some
floppy disks that can be booted from, and then boot from them.If you are not installing directly from
CDROM, DVD, or FTP then you are probably preparing your own
installation media (e.g., an MS-DOS partition), which must be prepared
before you install FreeBSD. This is a slightly more advanced,
infrequent activity, and is documented in . This includes the scenario where you
want to create your own FTP site on your own network so that other
computers can use your site as a FreeBSD FTP installation site.In general, to create boot floppy images, follow these
steps:Acquire the Boot Floppy ImagesThe boot discs are available on your installation media
in the floppies directory, and
can also be downloaded from the
floppies directory.The floppy images have a .flp extension.
The floppies/ directory contains a number of
different images, and the ones you will need to use depends on the
version of FreeBSD you are installing, and in some cases, the
hardware you are installing to. In most cases you will need two
files, kern.flp and
mfsroot.flp, but check
README.TXT in the same directory to be
sure.Your FTP program must use binary mode
to download these disk images. Some web browsers have been
known to use text (or
ASCII) mode, which will be apparent if you
cannot boot from the disks.Prepare the Floppy DisksYou must prepare one floppy disk per image file you had to
download. It is imperative that these disks are free from
defects. The easiest way to test this is to format the disks
for yourself. Do not trust pre-formatted floppies.If you try to install FreeBSD and the installation
program crashes, freezes, or otherwise misbehaves, one of
the first things to suspect is the floppies. Try writing
the floppy image files to some other disks and try
again.Write the Image Files to the Floppy DisksThe .flp files are
not regular files you copy to the disk.
Instead, they are images of the complete contents of the
disk. This means that you cannot use
commands like DOS' copy to write the
files. Instead, you must use specific tools to write the
images directly to the disk.DOSIf you are creating the floppies on a computer running
DOS/Windows, then we provide a tool to do
this called fdimage.If you are using the floppies from the CDROM, and your
CDROM is the E: drive, then you would
run this:E:\>tools\fdimage floppies\kern.flp A:Repeat this command for each .flp
file, replacing the floppy disk each time, being sure to label
the disks with the name of the file that you copied to them.
Adjust the command line as necessary, depending on where you have
placed the .flp files. If you do not have
the CDROM, then fdimage can be downloaded from
the tools
directory on the FreeBSD FTP site.If you are writing the floppies on a Unix system (such as
another FreeBSD system) you can use the &man.dd.1; command to
write the image files directly to disk. On FreeBSD, you would
run:&prompt.root; dd if=kern.flp of=/dev/fd0On FreeBSD, /dev/fd0 refers to the
first floppy disk (the A: drive).
/dev/fd1 would be the
B: drive, and so on. Other Unix
variants might have different names for the floppy disk
devices, and you will need to check the documentation for the
system as necessary.You are now ready to start installing FreeBSD.Starting the InstallationBy default, the installation will not make any changes to your
disk(s) until you see the following message:Last Chance: Are you SURE you want continue the installation?
If you're running this on a disk with data you wish to save then WE
STRONGLY ENCOURAGE YOU TO MAKE PROPER BACKUPS before proceeding!
We can take no responsibility for lost disk contents!The install can be exited at any time prior to the final
warning without changing the contents of the hard drive. If you are
concerned that you have configured something incorrectly you can just
turn the computer off before this point, and no damage will be
done.BootingBooting for the i386Start with your computer turned off.Turn on the computer. As it starts it should display an
option to enter the system set up menu, or BIOS, commonly reached
by keys like F2, F10,
Del, or
AltS. Use whichever keystroke is indicated on screen. In
some cases your computer may display a graphic while it starts.
Typically, pressing Esc will dismiss the graphic
and allow you to see the necessary messages.Find the setting that controls which devices the system boots
from. This is commonly shown as a list of devices, such as
Floppy, CDROM,
First Hard Disk, and so on.If you needed to prepare boot floppies, then make sure that the
floppy disk is selected. If you are booting from the CDROM then
make sure that that is selected instead. In case of doubt, you
should consult the manual that came with your computer, and/or its
motherboard.Make the change, then save and exit. The computer should now
restart.If you needed to prepare boot floppies, as described in
then one of them will be the
first boot disc, probably the one containing
kern.flp. Put this disc in your floppy
drive.If you are booting from CDROM, then you will need to turn on
the computer, and insert the CDROM at the first
opportunity.If your computer starts up as normal, and loads your existing
operating system then either:The disks were not inserted early enough in the boot
process. Leave them in, and try restarting your
computer.The BIOS changes earlier did not work correctly. You
should redo that step until you get the right option.FreeBSD will start to boot. If you are booting from CDROM you
will see a display similar to this:Verifying DMI Pool Data ........
Boot from ATAPI CD-ROM :
1. FD 2.88MB System Type-(00)
Uncompressing ... done
BTX loader 1.00 BTX version is 1.01
Console: internal video/keyboard
BIOS drive A: is disk0
BIOS drive B: is disk1
BIOS drive C: is disk2
BIOS drive C: is disk3
BIOS 639kB/261120kB available memory
FreeBSD/i386 bootstrap loader, Revision 0.8
(root@storm.FreeBSD.org.uk, Thu May 16 05:15:03 GMT 2002)
/kernel text=0x277391 data=0x3268c+0x332a8 |
|
Hit [Enter] to boot immediately, or any other key for command prompt.
Booting [kernel] in 9 seconds... _If you are booting from floppy disc, you will see a display
similar to this:Verifying DMI Pool Data ........
BTX loader 1.00 BTX version is 1.01
Console: internal video/keyboard
BIOS drive A: is disk0
BIOS drive C: is disk1
BIOS 639kB/261120kB available memory
FreeBSD/i386 bootstrap loader, Revision 0.8
(root@storm.FreeBSD.org.uk, Thu May 16 05:15:03 GMT 2002)
/kernel text=0x277391 data=0x3268c+0x332a8 |
Please insert MFS root floppy and press enter:Follow these instructions by removing the
kern.flp disc, insert the
mfsroot.flp disc, and press
Enter.Irrespective of whether you booted from floppy or CDROM, the
boot process will then get to this point:Hit [Enter] to boot immediately, or any other key for command prompt.
Booting [kernel] in 9 seconds... _Either wait ten seconds, or press Enter. This
will then launch the kernel configuration menu.Booting for the AlphaAlphaStart with your computer turned off.Turn on the computer and wait for a boot monitor
prompt.If you needed to prepare boot floppies, as described in
then one of them will be the
first boot disc, probably the one containing
kern.flp. Put this disc in your floppy
drive and type the following command to boot the disk
(substituting the name of your floppy drive if
necessary):>>>BOOT DVA0 -FLAGS '' -FILE ''If you are booting from CDROM, insert the CDROM into
the drive and type the following command to start the
installation (substituting the name of the appropriate
CDROM drive if necessary):>>>BOOT DKA0 -FLAGS '' -FILE ''FreeBSD will start to boot. If you are booting from a
floppy disc, at some point you will see the message:Please insert MFS root floppy and press enter:Follow these instructions by removing the
kern.flp disc, insert the
mfsroot.flp disc, and press
Enter.Irrespective of whether you booted from floppy or CDROM, the
boot process will then get to this point:Hit [Enter] to boot immediately, or any other key for command prompt.
Booting [kernel] in 9 seconds... _Either wait ten seconds, or press Enter. This
will then launch the kernel configuration menu.Kernel ConfigurationThe kernel is the core of the operating
system. It is responsible for many things, including access to all
the devices you may have on your system, such as hard disks, network
cards, sound cards, and so on. Each piece of hardware supported by
the FreeBSD kernel has a driver associated with it. Each driver has a
two or three letter name, such as sa for the
SCSI sequential access driver, or sio for the
Serial I/O driver (which manages COM ports).When the kernel starts, each driver checks the system to see
whether or not the hardware it supports exists on your system. If it
does, then the driver configures the hardware and makes it available
to the rest of the kernel.This checking is commonly referred to as device
probing. Unfortunately, it is not always possible to do
this in a safe way. Some hardware drivers do not co-exist well
together, and probing for one piece of hardware can sometimes leave
another in an inconsistent state. This is a basic
limitation of the design of the PC.Many older devices are called ISA devices—as opposed
to PCI devices. The ISA specification requires each device to have
some information hard coded into it, typically the Interrupt Request
Line number (IRQ) and IO port address that the driver uses. This
information is commonly set by using physical
jumpers on the card, or by using a DOS based
utility.This was often a source of problems, because it was not possible
to have two devices that shared the same IRQ or port address.Newer devices follow the PCI specification, which does not require
this, as the devices are supposed to cooperate with the BIOS, and be
told which IRQ and IO port addresses to use.If you have any ISA devices in your computer then FreeBSD's
driver for that device will need to be configured with the IRQ and
port address that you have set the card to. This is why carrying out
an inventory of your hardware (see ) can be useful.Unfortunately, the default IRQs and memory ports used by some
drivers clash. This is because some ISA devices are shipped with IRQs
or memory ports that clash. The defaults in FreeBSD's drivers are
deliberately set to mirror the manufacturer's defaults, so that, out
of the box, as many devices as possible will work.This is almost never an issue when running FreeBSD day-to-day.
Your computer will not normally contain two pieces of hardware that
clash, because one of them would not work (irrespective of the
operating system you are using).It becomes an issue when you are installing FreeBSD for the first
time because the kernel used to carry out the install has to contain
as many drivers as possible, so that many different hardware
configurations can be supported. This means that some of
those drivers will have conflicting configurations. The devices are
probed in a strict order, and if you own a device that is probed late
in the process, but conflicted with an earlier probe, then your
hardware might not function or be probed correctly when you install
FreeBSD.Because of this, the first thing you have the opportunity to do
when installing FreeBSD is look at the list of drivers that are
configured into the kernel, and either disable some of them, if you
do not own that device, or confirm (and alter) the driver's
configuration if you do own the device but the defaults are
wrong.This probably sounds much more complicated than it actually
is. shows the first kernel
configuration menu. We recommend that you choose the
Start kernel configuration in full-screen visual
mode option, as it presents the easiest interface for
the new user.Kernel Configuration MenuThe kernel configuration screen ()
is then divided into four sections.A collapsible list of all the drivers that are currently
marked as active, subdivided into groups such as
Storage, and Network. Each
driver is shown as a description, its two or three letter driver
name, and the IRQ and memory port used by that driver. In
addition, if an active driver conflicts with another active driver
then CONF is shown next to the driver name.
This section also shows the total number of conflicting drivers
that are currently active.Drivers that have been marked inactive. They remain in the
kernel, but they will not probe for their device when the kernel
starts. These are subdivided into groups in the same way as the
active driver list.More detail about the currently selected driver, including its
IRQ and memory port address.Information about the keystrokes that are valid at this point
in time.The Kernel Device Configuration Visual InterfaceAt this point there will always be conflicts listed. Do not worry
about this, it is to be expected; all the drivers are enabled, and
as has already been explained, some of them will conflict with one
another.You now have to work through the list of drivers, resolving the
conflicts.Resolving Driver ConflictsPress X. This will completely expand the
list of drivers, so you can see all of them. You will need to use
the arrow keys to scroll back and forth through the active driver
list. shows the result of
pressing X. Expanded Driver ListDisable all the drivers for devices that you do not have. To
disable a driver, highlight it with the arrow keys and press
Del. The driver will be moved to the
Inactive Drivers list.If you inadvertently disable a device that you need then press
Tab to switch to the Inactive
Drivers list, select the driver that you disabled, and
press Enter to move it back to the active
list.Do not disable sc0. This controls
the screen, and you will need this unless you are installing
over a serial cable.Only disable atkbd0 if you are
using a USB keyboard. If you have a normal keyboard then you
must keep atkbd0.If there are no conflicts listed then you can skip this step.
Otherwise, the remaining conflicts need to be examined. If they
do not have the indication of an allowed conflict
in the message area, then either the IRQ/address for device probe
will need to be changed, or the IRQ/address
on the hardware will need to be changed.To change the driver's configuration for IRQ and IO port
address, select the device and press Enter. The
cursor will move to the third section of the screen, and you can
change the values. You should enter the values for IRQ and port
address that you discovered when you made your hardware inventory.
Press Q to finish editing the device's
configuration and return to the active driver list.If you are not sure what these figures should be then you can
try using -1. Some FreeBSD drivers can safely
probe the hardware to discover what the correct value should be,
and a value of -1 configures them to do
this.The procedure for changing the address on the hardware varies
from device to device. For some devices you may need to
physically remove the card from your computer and adjust jumper
settings or DIP switches. Other cards may have come with a DOS
floppy that contains the programs used to reconfigure the card.
In any case, you should refer to the documentation that came with
the device. This will obviously entail restarting your computer,
so you will need to boot back into the FreeBSD installation
routine when you have reconfigured the card.When all the conflicts have been resolved the screen will look
similar to .Driver Configuration With No ConflictsAs you can see, the active driver list is now much smaller,
with only drivers for the hardware that actually exists being
listed.You can now save these changes, and move on to the next step
of the install. Press Q to quit the device
configuration interface. This message will appear:Save these parameters before exiting? ([Y]es/[N]o/[C]ancel)Answer Y to save the parameters and the
probing will start. After displaying the probe results in white
on black text Sysinstall will start
and display its main menu
().Sysinstall Main MenuReviewing the Device Probe ResultsThe last few hundred lines that have been displayed on screen are
stored and can be reviewed.To review the buffer, press Scroll Lock. This
turns on scrolling in the display. You can then use the arrow keys, or
PageUp and PageDown to view the
results. Press Scroll Lock again to stop
scrolling.Do this now, to review the text that scrolled off the screen when
the kernel was carrying out the device probes. You will see text
similar to , although the precise
text will differ depending on the devices that you have in your
computer.Typical Device Probe Resultsavail memory = 253050880 (247120K bytes)
Preloaded elf kernel "kernel" at 0xc0817000.
Preloaded mfs_root "/mfsroot" at 0xc0817084.
md0: Preloaded image </mfsroot> 4423680 bytes at 0xc03ddcd4
md1: Malloc disk
Using $PIR table, 4 entries at 0xc00fde60
npx0: <math processor> on motherboard
npx0: INT 16 interface
pcib0: <Host to PCI bridge> on motherboard
pci0: <PCI bus> on pcib0
pcib1:<VIA 82C598MVP (Apollo MVP3) PCI-PCI (AGP) bridge> at device 1.0 on pci0
pci1: <PCI bus> on pcib1
pci1: <Matrox MGA G200 AGP graphics accelereator> at 0.0 irq 11
isab0: <VIA 82C586 PCI-ISA bridge> at device 7.0 on pci0
isa0: <iSA bus> on isab0
atapci0: <VIA 82C586 ATA33 controller> port 0xe000-0xe00f at device 7.1 on pci0
ata0: at 0x1f0 irq 14 on atapci0
ata1: at 0x170 irq 15 on atapci0
uhci0 <VIA 83C572 USB controller> port 0xe400-0xe41f irq 10 at device 7.2 on pci
0
usb0: <VIA 83572 USB controller> on uhci0
usb0: USB revision 1.0
uhub0: VIA UHCI root hub, class 9/0, rev 1.00/1.00, addr1
uhub0: 2 ports with 2 removable, self powered
pci0: <unknown card> (vendor=0x1106, dev=0x3040) at 7.3
dc0: <ADMtek AN985 10/100BaseTX> port 0xe800-0xe8ff mem 0xdb000000-0xeb0003ff ir
q 11 at device 8.0 on pci0
dc0: Ethernet address: 00:04:5a:74:6b:b5
miibus0: <MII bus> on dc0
ukph70: <Generic IEEE 802.3u media interface> on miibus0
ukphy0: 10baseT, 10baseT-FDX, 100baseTX, 100baseTX-FDX, auto
ed0: <NE2000 PCI Ethernet (RealTek 8029)> port 0xec00-0xec1f irq 9 at device 10.
0 on pci0
ed0 address 52:54:05:de:73:1b, type NE2000 (16 bit)
isa0: too many dependant configs (8)
isa0: unexpected small tag 14
orm0: <Option ROM> at iomem 0xc0000-0xc7fff on isa0
fdc0: <NEC 72065B or clone> at port 0x3f0-0x3f5,0x3f7 irq 6 drq2 on isa0
fdc0: FIFO enabled, 8 bytes threshold
fd0: <1440-KB 3.5" drive> on fdc0 drive 0
atkbdc0: <Keyboard controller (i8042)> at port 0x60,0x64 on isa0
atkbd0: <AT Keyboard> flags 0x1 irq1 on atkbdc0
kbd0 at atkbd0
psm0: <PS/2 Mouse> irq 12 on atkbdc0
psm0: model Generic PS/@ mouse, device ID 0
vga0: <Generic ISA VGA> at port 0x3c0-0x3df iomem 0xa0000-0xbffff on isa0
sc0: <System console> at flags 0x100 on isa0
sc0: VGA <16 virtual consoles, flags=0x300>
sio0 at port 0x3f8-0x3ff irq 4 flags 0x10 on isa0
sio0: type 16550A
sio1 at port 0x2f8-0x2ff irq 3 on isa0
sio1: type 16550A
ppc0: <Parallel port> at port 0x378-0x37f irq 7 on isa0
pppc0: SMC-like chipset (ECP/EPP/PS2/NIBBLE) in COMPATIBLE mode
ppc0: FIFO with 16/16/15 bytes threshold
plip0: <PLIP network interfce> on ppbus0
ad0: 8063MB <IBM-DHEA-38451> [16383/16/63] at ata0-master UDMA33
acd0: CD-RW <LITE-ON LTR-1210B> at ata1-slave PIO4
Mounting root from ufs:/dev/md0c
/stand/sysinstall running as init on vty0Check the probe results carefully to make sure that FreeBSD found
all the devices you expected. If a device was not found, then it will
not be listed. If the device's driver required configuring
with the IRQ and port address then you should check that you entered
them correctly.If you need to make changes to the UserConfig device probing,
its easy to exit the sysinstall program
and start over again. Its also a good way to become more familiar
with the process.Select Sysinstall ExitUse the arrow keys to select
Exit Install from the Main
Install Screen menu. The following message will display: User Confirmation Requested
Are you sure you wish to exit? The system will reboot
(be sure to remove any floppies from the drives).
[ Yes ] NoThe install program will start again if the CDROM is left
in the drive and [Yes] is selected.If you are booting from floppies it will be necessary to remove
the mfsroot.flp floppy and replace it with
kern.flp before rebooting.Introducing SysinstallSysinstall is the installation
application provided by the FreeBSD Project. It is console based and is
divided into a number of menus and screens that you can use to
configure and control the installation process.The Sysinstall menu system is controlled
by the arrow keys, Enter, Space, and
other keys. A detailed description of these keys, and what they do, is
contained in Sysinstall's usage
information.To review this information, ensure that the
Usage entry is highlighted and that the
[Select] button is selected, as shown in , then press Enter.The instructions for using the menu system will be displayed. After
reviewing them, press Enter to return to the Main
Menu.Selecting Usage From Sysinstall Main MenuSelecting The Documentation MenuFrom the Main Menu, select Doc with
the arrow keys and
press Enter.Selecting Documentation MenuThis will display the Documentation Menu.Sysinstall Documentation MenuIt is important to read the documents provided.To view a document, select it with the arrow keys and
press Enter. When finished reading a document,
pressing Enter will return to the Documentation
Menu.To return to the Main Installation Menu, select
Exit with the
arrow keys and press Enter.Selecting The Keymap MenuTo change the keyboard mapping, use the arrow keys to select
Keymap from the menu and press
Enter.Sysinstall Main MenuA different keyboard mapping may be chosen by selecting the
menu item using up/down arrow keys and pressing Space.
Pressing Space again will unselect the item. When
finished, choose the &gui.ok; using the
arrow keys and press
Enter.Only a partial list is shown in this screen representation.
Selecting &gui.cancel; will use the default
keymap and return to the Main Install Menu.Sysinstall Keymap MenuInstallation Options ScreenSelect Options and press
Enter.Sysinstall Main MenuSysinstall OptionsThe default values are usually fine for most users and do
not need to be changed.The description of the selected item will appear at the
bottom of the screen highlighted in blue. Notice that one of the
options is Use Defaults to reset all
values to startup defaults.Press F1 to read the help screen about the
various options.Pressing Q will return to the Main Install
menu.Begin A Standard InstallationThe Standard installation is the
option recommended for those new to Unix or FreeBSD. Use the arrow
keys to select Standard and
then press Enter to start the installation.Begin Standard InstallationAllocating Disk SpaceYour first task is to allocate disk space for FreeBSD, and label
that space so that Sysinstall can prepare
it. In order to do this you need to know how FreeBSD expects to find
information on the disk.BIOS Drive NumberingBefore you install and configure FreeBSD on your system, there is an
important subject that you should be aware of, especially if you have
multiple hard drives.DOSMicrosoft WindowsIn a PC running a BIOS-dependent operating system such as
MS-DOS or Microsoft Windows, the BIOS is able to abstract the
normal disk drive order, and
the operating system goes along with the change. This allows the user
to boot from a disk drive other than the so-called primary
master. This is especially convenient for some users who have
found that the simplest and cheapest way to keep a system backup is to
buy an identical second hard drive, and perform routine copies of the
first drive to the second drive using
Ghost or XCOPY
. Then, if the
first drive fails, or is attacked by a virus, or is scribbled upon by an
operating system defect, he can easily recover by instructing the BIOS
to logically swap the drives. It is like switching the cables on the
drives, but without having to open the case.SCSIBIOSMore expensive systems with SCSI controllers often include BIOS
extensions which allow the SCSI drives to be re-ordered in a similar
fashion for up to seven drives.A user who is accustomed to taking advantage of these features may
become surprised when the results with FreeBSD are not as expected.
FreeBSD does not use the BIOS, and does not know the logical BIOS
drive mapping. This can lead to very perplexing situations,
especially when drives are physically identical in geometry, and have
also been made as data clones of one another.When using FreeBSD, always restore the BIOS to natural drive
numbering before installing FreeBSD, and then leave it that way. If you
need to switch drives around, then do so, but do it the hard way, and
open the case and move the jumpers and cables.An Illustration from the Files of Bill and Fred's Exceptional
Adventures:Bill breaks-down an older Wintel box to make another FreeBSD box
for Fred. Bill installs a single SCSI drive as SCSI unit zero and
installs FreeBSD on it.Fred begins using the system, but after several days notices that
the older SCSI drive is reporting numerous soft errors and reports
this fact to Bill.After several more days, Bill decides it is time to address the
situation, so he grabs an identical SCSI drive from the disk drive
archive in the back room. An initial surface scan
indicates that
this drive is functioning well, so Bill installs this drive as SCSI
unit four and makes an image copy from drive zero to drive four. Now
that the new drive is installed and functioning nicely, Bill decides
that it is a good idea to start using it, so he uses features in the
SCSI BIOS to re-order the disk drives so that the system boots from
SCSI unit four. FreeBSD boots and runs just fine.Fred continues his work for several days, and soon Bill and Fred
decide that it is time for a new adventure -- time to upgrade to a
newer version of FreeBSD. Bill removes SCSI unit zero because it was
a bit flaky and replaces it with another identical disk drive from
the archive. Bill then installs the new version of
FreeBSD onto the new SCSI unit zero using Fred's magic Internet FTP
floppies. The installation goes well.Fred uses the new version of FreeBSD for a few days, and certifies
that it is good enough for use in the engineering department. It is
time to copy all of his work from the old version. So Fred mounts
SCSI unit four (the latest copy of the older FreeBSD version). Fred
is dismayed to find that none of his precious work is present on SCSI
unit four.Where did the data go?When Bill made an image copy of the original SCSI unit zero onto
SCSI unit four, unit four became the new clone.
When Bill
re-ordered the SCSI BIOS so that he could boot from SCSI unit four, he
was only fooling himself. FreeBSD was still running on SCSI unit zero.
Making this kind of BIOS change will cause some or all of the Boot and
Loader code to be fetched from the selected BIOS drive, but when the
FreeBSD kernel drivers take-over, the BIOS drive numbering will be
ignored, and FreeBSD will transition back to normal drive numbering.
In the illustration at hand, the system continued to operate on the
original SCSI unit zero, and all of Fred's data was there, not on SCSI
unit four. The fact that the system appeared to be running on SCSI
unit four was simply an artifact of human expectations.We are delighted to mention that no data bytes were killed or
harmed in any way by our discovery of this phenomenon. The older SCSI
unit zero was retrieved from the bone pile, and all of Fred's work was
returned to him, (and now Bill knows that he can count as high as
zero).Although SCSI drives were used in this illustration, the concepts
apply equally to IDE drives.Disk OrganizationThe smallest unit of organization that FreeBSD uses to find files
is the filename. Filenames are case-sensitive, which means that
readme.txt and README.TXT
are two separate files. FreeBSD does not use the extension
(.txt) of a file to determine whether the file is
program, or a document, or some other form of data.Files are stored in directories. A directory may contain no
files, or it may contain many hundreds of files. A directory can also
contain other directories, allowing you to build up a hierarchy of
directories within one another. This makes it much easier to organize
your data.Files and directories are referenced by giving the file or
directory name, followed by a forward slash, /,
followed by any other directory names that are necessary. If you have
directory foo, which contains directory
bar, which contains the file
readme.txt, then the full name, or
path to the file is
foo/bar/readme.txt.Directories and files are stored in a filesystem. Each filesystem
contains exactly one directory at the very top level, called the
root directory for that filesystem. This root
directory can then contain other directories.So far this is probably similar to any other operating system you
may have used. There are a few differences; for example, DOS uses
\ to separate file and directory names, while MacOS
uses :.FreeBSD does not use drive letters, or other drive names in the
path. You would not write c:/foo/bar/readme.txt
on FreeBSD.Instead, one filesystem is designated the root
filesystem. The root filesystem's root directory is
referred to as /. Every other filesystem is then
mounted under the root filesystem. No matter
how many disks you have on your FreeBSD system, every directory
appears to be part of the same disk.Suppose you have three filesystems, called A,
B, and C. Each filesystem has
one root directory, which contains two other directories, called
A1, A2 (and likewise
B1, B2 and
C1, C2).Call A the root filesystem. If you used the
ls command to view the contents of this directory
you would see two subdirectories, A1 and
A2. The directory tree looks like this: /
|
+--- A1
|
`--- A2A filesystem must be mounted on to a directory in another
filesystem. So now suppose that you mount filesystem
B on to the directory A1. The
root directory of B replaces A1,
and the directories in B appear accordingly: /
|
+--- A1
| |
| +--- B1
| |
| `--- B2
|
`--- A2Any files that are in the B1 or
B2 directories can be reached with the path
/A1/B1 or /A1/B2 as
necessary. Any files that were in /A1 have been
temporarily hidden. They will reappear if B is
unmounted from A.If B had been mounted on A2
then the diagram would look like this: /
|
+--- A1
|
`--- A2
|
+--- B1
|
`--- B2and the paths would be /A2/B1 and
/A2/B2 respectively.Filesystems can be mounted on top of one another. Continuing the
last example, the C filesystem could be mounted on
top of the B1 directory in the B
filesystem, leading to this arrangement: /
|
+--- A1
|
`--- A2
|
+--- B1
| |
| +--- C1
| |
| `--- C2
|
`--- B2Or C could be mounted directly on to the
A filesystem, under the A1
directory: /
|
+--- A1
| |
| +--- C1
| |
| `--- C2
|
`--- A2
|
+--- B1
|
`--- B2If you are familiar with DOS, this is similar, although not
identical, to the join command.This is not normally something you need to concern yourself with.
Typically you create filesystems when installing FreeBSD and decide
where to mount them, and then never change them unless you add a new
disk.It is entirely possible to have one large root filesystem, and not
need to create any others. There are some drawbacks to this approach,
and one advantage.Benefits of multiple filesystemsDifferent filesystems can have different mount
options. For example, with careful planning, the
root filesystem can be mounted read-only, making it impossible for
you to inadvertently delete or edit a critical file.FreeBSD automatically optimizes the layout of files on a
filesystem, depending on how the filesystem is being used. So a
filesystem that contains many small files that are written
frequently will have a different optimization to one that contains
fewer, larger files. By having one big filesystem this
optimization breaks down.FreeBSD's filesystems are very robust should you lose power.
However, a power loss at a critical point could still damage the
structure of the filesystem. By splitting your data over multiple
filesystems it is more likely that the system will still come up,
making it easier for you to restore from backup as
necessary.Benefit of a single filesystemFilesystems are a fixed size. If you create a filesystem when
you install FreeBSD and give it a specific size, you may later
discover that you need to make the partition bigger. This is not
easily accomplished without backing up, recreating the filesystems
with the size, and then restoring.FreeBSD 4.4 and up have a featured command, the
&man.growfs.8;, which will makes it possible to
increase the size of a filesystem on the fly, removing this
limitation.Filesystems are contained in partitions. This does not have the
same meaning as the earlier usage of the term partition in this
chapter, because of FreeBSD's Unix heritage. Each partition is
identified by a letter, a through to
h. Each partition can only contain one filesystem,
which means that filesystems are often described by either their
typical mount point on the root filesystem, or the letter of the
partition they are contained in.FreeBSD also uses disk space for swap
space. Swap space provides FreeBSD with
virtual memory. This allows your computer to
behave as though it has much more memory than it actually does. When
FreeBSD runs out of memory it moves some of the data that is not
currently being used to the swap space, and moves it back in (moving
something else out) when it needs it.Some partitions have certain conventions associated with
them.PartitionConventionaNormally contains the root filesystembNormally contains swap spacecNormally the same size as the enclosing slice. This
allows utilities that need to work on the entire slice (for
example, a bad block scanner) to work on the
c partition. You would not normally create
a filesystem on this partition.dPartition d used to have a special
meaning associated with it, although that is now gone. To
this day, some tools may operate oddly if told to work on
partition d, so
Sysinstall will not normally create
partition d.Each partition-that-contains-a-filesystem is stored in what
FreeBSD calls a slice. Slice is FreeBSD's term
for what were earlier called partitions, and again, this is because of
FreeBSD's Unix background. Slices are numbered, starting at 1,
through to 4.slicespartitionsdangerously dedicatedSlice numbers follow
the device name, prefixed with an s,
starting at 1. So da0s1
is the first slice on the first SCSI drive. There can only be
four physical slices on a disk, but you can have logical
slices inside physical slices of the appropriate type. These
extended slices are numbered starting at 5, so
ad0s5 is the first
extended slice on a disk. These devices are used by file
systems that expect to occupy a slice.Slices, dangerously dedicated physical
drives, and other drives contain
partitions, which are represented as
letters from a to h.
This letter is appended to the device name, so
da0a is the a partition on
the first da drive, which is dangerously dedicated.
ad1s3e is the fifth partition
in the third slice of the second IDE disk drive.Finally, each disk on the system is identified. A disk name
starts with a code that indicates the type of disk, and then a number,
indicating which disk it is. Unlike slices, disk numbering starts at
0. Common codes that you will see are listed in
.When referring to a partition FreeBSD requires that you also name
the slice and disk that contains the partition, and when referring to
a slice you should also refer to the disk name. Do this by listing
the disk name, s, the slice number, and then the
partition letter. Examples are shown in
. shows a conceptual
model of the disk layout that should help make things clearer.In order to install FreeBSD you must first configure the disk
slices, then create partitions within the slice you will use for
FreeBSD, and then create a filesystem (or swap space) in each
partition, and decide where that filesystem will be mounted.
Disk Device CodesCodeMeaningadATAPI (IDE) diskdaSCSI direct access diskacdATAPI (IDE) CDROMcdSCSI CDROMfdFloppy disk
Sample Disk, Slice, and Partition NamesNameMeaningad0s1aThe first partition (a) on the first
slice (s1) on the first IDE disk
(ad0).da1s2eThe fifth partition (e) on the
second slice (s2) on the second SCSI disk
(da1).Conceptual Model of a DiskThis diagram shows FreeBSD's view of the first IDE disk attached
to the system. Assume that the disk is 4GB in size, and contains
two 2GB slices (DOS partitions). The first slice contains a DOS
disk, C:, and the second slice contains a
FreeBSD installation. This example FreeBSD installation has three
partitions, and a swap partition.The three partitions will each hold a filesystem. Partition
a will be used for the root filesystem,
e for the /var directory
hierarchy, and f for the
/usr directory hierarchy..-----------------. --.
| | |
| DOS / Windows | |
: : > First slice, ad0s1
: : |
| | |
:=================: ==: --.
| | | Partition a, mounted as / |
| | > referred to as ad0s2a |
| | | |
:-----------------: ==: |
| | | Partition b, used as swap |
| | > referred to as ad0s2b |
| | | |
:-----------------: ==: | Partition c, no
| | | Partition e, used as /var > filesystem, all
| | > referred to as ad0s2e | of FreeBSD slice,
| | | | ad0s2c
:-----------------: ==: |
| | | |
: : | Partition f, used as /usr |
: : > referred to as ad0s2f |
: : | |
| | | |
| | --' |
`-----------------' --'Creating Slices using FDiskNo changes you make at this point will be written to the disk.
If you think you have made a mistake and want to start again you can
use the menus to exit Sysinstall and try
again. If you get confused and can not see how to exit you can
always turn your computer off.After choosing to begin a standard installation in
Sysinstall you will be shown this
message: Message
In the next menu, you will need to set up a DOS-style ("fdisk")
partitioning scheme for your hard disk. If you simply wish to devote
all disk space to FreeBSD (overwriting anything else that might be on
the disk(s) selected) then use the (A)ll command to select the default
partitioning scheme followed by a (Q)uit. If you wish to allocate only
free space to FreeBSD, move to a partition marked "unused" and use the
(C)reate command.
[ OK ]
[ Press enter or space ]Press Enter as instructed. You will then be
shown a list of all the hard drives that the kernel found when it
carried out the device probes.
shows an example from a
system with two IDE disks. They have been called
ad0 and ad2.Select Drive for FDiskYou might be wondering why ad1 is not
listed here. Why has it been missed?Consider what would happen if you had two IDE hard disks, one
as the master on the first IDE controller, and one as the master on
the second IDE controller. If FreeBSD numbered these as it found
them, as ad0 and
ad1 then everything would work.But if you then added a third disk, as the slave device on the
first IDE controller, it would now be ad1,
and the previous ad1 would become
ad2. Because device names (such as
ad1s1a) are used to find filesystems, you
may suddenly discover that some of your filesystems no longer
appear correctly, and you would need to change your FreeBSD
configuration.To work around this, the kernel can be configured to name IDE
disks based on where they are, and not the order in which they were
found. With this scheme the master disk on the second IDE
controller will always be
ad2, even if there are no
ad0 or ad1
devices.This configuration is the default for the FreeBSD kernel, which
is why this display shows ad0 and
ad2. The machine on which this screenshot
was taken had IDE disks on both master channels of the IDE
controllers, and no disks on the slave channels.You should select the disk on which you want to install FreeBSD,
and then press &gui.ok;.
FDisk will start, with a display similar to
that shown in .The FDisk display is broken into three
sections.The first section, covering the first two lines of the display,
shows details about the currently selected disk, including its FreeBSD
name, the disk geometry, and the total size of the disk.The second section shows the slices that are currently on the
disk, where they start and end, how large they are, the name FreeBSD
gives them, and their description and sub-type. This example shows two
small unused slices, which are artifacts of disk layout schemes on the
PC. It also shows one large FAT slice, which almost certainly appears
as C: in DOS / Windows, and an extended
slice, which may contain other drive letters for DOS / Windows.The third section shows the commands that are available in
FDisk.Typical Fdisk Partitions Before EditingWhat you do now will depend on how you want to slice up your
disk.If you want to use FreeBSD for the entire disk (which will delete
all the other data on this disk when you confirm that you want
Sysinstall to continue later in the
installation process) then you can press A, which
corresponds to the Use Entire Disk option.
The existing slices will be removed, and replaced with a small area
flagged as unused (again, an artifact of PC disk
layout), and then one large slice for FreeBSD. If you do this then
you should then select the newly created FreeBSD slice using the arrow
keys, and press S to mark the slice as being
bootable. The screen will then look very similar to
. Note the
A in the Flags column, which
indicates that this slice is active, and will be
booted from.If you will be deleting an existing slice to make space for
FreeBSD then you should select the slice using the arrow keys, and
then press D. You can then press C,
and be prompted for size of slice you want to create. Enter the
appropriate figure and press Enter.If you have already made space for FreeBSD (perhaps by using a
tool such as Partition Magic) then you can
press C to create a new slice. Again, you will be
prompted for the size of slice you would like to create.Fdisk Partition Using Entire DiskWhen finished, press Q. Your changes will be
saved in Sysinstall, but will not yet be
written to disk.Install a Boot ManagerYou now have the option to install a boot manager. In general,
you should choose to install the FreeBSD boot manager if:You have more than one drive, and have installed FreeBSD onto
a drive other than the first one.You have installed FreeBSD alongside another operating system
on the same disk, and you want to choose whether to start FreeBSD
or the other operating system when you start the computer.Make your choice and press Enter.Sysinstall Boot Manager MenuThe help screen, reached by pressing F1,
discusses the problems that can be encountered when trying to share
the hard disk between operating systems.Creating Slices on Another DriveIf there is more than one drive, it will return to the
Select Drives screen after the boot manager selection. If you wish to
install FreeBSD on to more than one disk, then you can select another
disk here and repeat the slice process using
FDisk.Exit Select DriveThe Tab key toggles between the last drive
selected, &gui.ok;, and
&gui.cancel;.Press the Tab once to toggle to the
&gui.ok;, then
press Enter
to continue with the installation.Creating Partitions using
DisklabelYou must now create some partitions inside each slice that you
have just created. Remember that each partition is lettered, from
a through to h, and that
partitions b, c, and
d have conventional meanings that you should adhere
to.Certain applications can benefit from particular partition
schemes, especially if you are laying out partitions across more than
one disk. However, for this, your first FreeBSD installation, you do
not need to give too much thought to how you partition the disk. It
is more important that you install FreeBSD and start learning how to
use it. You can always re-install FreeBSD to change your partition
scheme when you are more familiar with the operating system.This scheme features four partitions—one for swap space, and
three for filesystems.
Partition Layout for First DiskPartitionFilesystemSizeDescriptiona/100MBThis is the root filesystem. Every other filesystem
will be mounted somewhere under this one. 100MB is a
reasonable size for this filesystem. You will not be storing
too much data on it, as a regular FreeBSD install will put
about 40MB of data here. The remaining space is for temporary
data, and also leaves expansion space if future versions of
FreeBSD need more space in /.bN/A2-3 x RAMThe system's swap space is kept on this partition.
Choosing the right amount of swap space can be a bit of an
art. A good rule of thumb is that your swap
space should be two or three times as much as the
available physical memory (RAM).
You should also have at least 64MB of swap, so if you have
less than 32MB of RAM in your computer then set the swap
amount to 64MB.
If you have more than one disk then you can put swap
space on each disk. FreeBSD will then use each disk for
swap, which effectively speeds up the act of swapping. In
this case, calculate the total amount of swap you need
(e.g., 128MB), and then divide this by the number of disks
you have (e.g., two disks) to give the amount of swap you
should put on each disk, in this example, 64MB of swap per
disk.e/var50MBThe /var directory contains variable
length files; log files, and other administrative files. Many
of these files are read-from or written-to extensively during
FreeBSD's day-to-day running. Putting these files on another
filesystem allows FreeBSD to optimise the access of these
files without affecting other files in other directories that
do not have the same access pattern.f/usrRest of diskAll your other files will typically be stored in
/usr, and its subdirectories.
If you will be installing FreeBSD on to more than one disk then
you must also create partitions in the other slices that you
configured. The easiest way to do this is to create two partitions on
each disk, one for the swap space, and one for a filesystem.
Partition Layout for Subsequent DisksPartitionFilesystemSizeDescriptionbN/ASee descriptionAs already discussed, you can split swap space across
each disk. Even though the a partition is
free, convention dictates that swap space stays on the
b partition.e/disknRest of diskThe rest of the disk is taken up with one big partition.
This could easily be put on the a
partition, instead of the e partition.
However, convention says that the a
partition on a slice is reserved for the filesystem that will
be the root (/) filesystem. You do not
have to follow this convention, but
Sysinstall does, so following it
yourself makes the installation slightly cleaner. You can
choose to mount this filesystem anywhere; this example
suggests that you mount them as directories
/diskn, where
n is a number that changes for each
disk. But you can use another scheme if you prefer.
Having chosen your partition layout you can now create it using
Sysinstall. You will see this
message: Message
Now, you need to create BSD partitions inside of the fdisk
partition(s) just created. If you have a reasonable amount of disk
space (200MB or more) and don't have any special requirements, simply
use the (A)uto command to allocate space automatically. If you have
more specific needs or just don't care for the layout chosen by
(A)uto, press F1 for more information on manual layout.
[ OK ]
[ Press enter or space ]Press Enter to start the FreeBSD partition
editor, called Disklabel. shows the display when you first
start Disklabel. The display is divided in
to three sections.The first few lines show the name of the disk you are currently
working on, and the slice that contains the partitions you are
creating (at this point Disklabel calls
this the Partition name rather than slice name).
This display also shows the amount of free space within the slice;
that is, space that was set aside in the slice, but that has not yet
been assigned to a partition.The middle of the display shows the partitions that have been
created, the name of the filesystem that each partition contains,
their size, and some options pertaining to the creation of the
filesystem.The bottom third of the screen shows the keystrokes that are valid
in Disklabel.Sysinstall Disklabel EditorDisklabel can automatically create
partitions for you and assign them default sizes. Try this now, by
Pressing A. You will see a display similar to that
shown in . Depending on the size of
the disk you are using the defaults may or may not be appropriate.
This does not matter, as you do not have to accept the
defaults.Beginning with FreeBSD 4.5, the default partitioning assigns
the /tmp directory its own partition instead
of being part of the / partition. This
helps avoid filling the / partition with
temporary files.Sysinstall Disklabel Editor With Auto DefaultsTo delete the suggested partitions, and replace them with your
own, use the arrow keys to select the first partition, and press
D to delete it. Repeat this to delete all the
suggested partitions.To create the first partition (a, mounted as
/), make sure the disk information at the top of
the screen is selected, and press C. A dialog box
will appear prompting you for the size of the new partition (as shown
in ). You can enter the size as
the number of disk blocks you want to use, or, more usefully, as a
number followed by either M for megabytes,
G for gigabytes, or C for
cylinders.Free Space For Root PartitionThe default size shown will create a partition that takes up the
rest of the slice. If you are using the partition sizes described
earlier, then delete the existing figure using
Backspace, and then type in
64M, as shown in
. Then press
&gui.ok;.Edit Root Partition SizeHaving chosen the partition's size you will then asked whether
this partition will contain a filesystem or swap space. The dialog
box is shown in . This first
partition will contain a filesystem, so check that
FS is selected and then press
Enter.Choose The Root Partition TypeFinally, because you are creating a filesystem, you must tell
Disklabel where the filesystem is to be
mounted. The dialog box is shown in
. The root filesystem's mount
point is /, so type /, and
then press Enter.Choose The Root Mount PointThe display will then update to show you the newly created
partition. You should repeat this procedure for the other
partitions. When you create the swap partition you will not be
prompted for the filesystem mount point, as swap partitions are never
mounted. When you create the final partition,
/usr, you can leave the suggested size as is, to
use the rest of the slice.Your final FreeBSD DiskLabel Editor screen will appear similar to
, although your values chosen may
be different. Press Q to finish.Sysinstall Disklabel EditorChoosing What To InstallSelect The Distribution SetDeciding which distribution set to install will depend largely
on the intended use of the system and the amount of disk space
available. The predefined options range from installing the
smallest possible configuration to everything. Those who are
new to Unix and/or FreeBSD should almost certainly select one
of these canned options. Customizing a distribution set is
typically for the more experienced user.Press F1 for more information on the
distribution set options and what they contain. When finished
reviewing the help, pressing Enter will return
to the Select Distributions Menu.If a graphical user interface is desired then a distribution
set that is preceded by an X should be
chosen. The configuration of XFree86 and selection of a default
desktop is part of the post-installation steps.The default XFree86 version installed is the 4.x branch. You
should check to see whether your video card is supported at the
XFree86 web site.
If it is only supported under the 3.x branch, select a distribution
without X for installation. After installation, install and
configure XFree86 3.x using the ports collection.If compiling a custom kernel is anticipated, select an option
which includes the source code. For more information on why a
custom kernel should be built or how to build a custom kernel see
.Obviously, the most versatile system is one that includes
everything. If there is adequate disk space, select
All as shown in
by using the arrow keys and
press Enter. If there is a concern about disk
space consider using an option that is more suitable for the
situation. Other distributions can be added after installation.Choose DistributionsInstalling The Ports CollectionAfter selecting the desired distribution, an opportunity to
install the FreeBSD Ports Collection is presented. The ports
collection is an easy and convenient way to install software.
The ports collection does not contain the source code necessary
to compile the software. It is a collection of files which
automates the downloading, compiling and installation.
discusses how to use the ports
collection.The installation program does not check to see if you have
adequate space. Select this option only if you have
adequate hard disk space. User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to install the FreeBSD ports collection?
This will give you ready access to over &os.numports; ported software packages,
at a cost of around 165MB of disk space when "clean" and possibly much
more than that if a lot of the distribution tarballs are loaded
(unless you have the extra CDs from a FreeBSD CD/DVD distribution
available and can mount it on /cdrom, in which case this is far less
of a problem).
The ports collection is a very valuable resource and well worth having
on your /usr partition, so it is advisable to say Yes to this option.
For more information on the ports collection & the latest ports,
visit:
http://www.FreeBSD.org/ports
[ Yes ] NoSelect [ Yes ] with the arrow keys to
install the ports collection or [ No ] to
skip this option. Press Enter to continue.
The Choose Distributions menu will redisplay.Confirm DistributionsIf satisfied with the options, select
Exit with the arrow keys, ensure that
&gui.ok; is highlighted, and press
Enter to continue.Choosing Your Installation MediaIf Installing from a CDROM, use the arrow keys to highlight
Install from a FreeBSD CD/DVD. Ensure
that &gui.ok; is highlighted, then press
Enter to proceed with the installation.For other methods of installation, select the appropriate
option and follow the instructions.Press F1 to display the Online Help for
installation media. Press Enter to return
to the media selection menu.Choose Installation MediaFTP Installation ModesinstallationnetworkFTPThere are three FTP installation modes you can choose from:
active FTP, passive FTP, or via a HTTP proxy.FTP Active, Install from an FTP
serverThis option will make all FTP transfers
use Active
mode. This will not work through firewalls, but will
often work with older FTP servers that do not support
passive mode. If your connection hangs with passive
mode (the default), try active!FTP Passive, Install from an FTP server through a
firewallFTPPassive modeThis option instructs FreeBSD to use
Passive mode for all FTP operations.
This allows the user to pass through firewalls
that do not allow incoming connections on random port
addresses.FTP via a HTTP proxy, Install from an FTP server
through a http proxyFTPvia a HTTP proxyThis option instructs FreeBSD to use the HTTP
protocol (like a web browser) to connect to a proxy
for all FTP operations. The proxy will translate
the requests and send them to the FTP server.
This allows the user to pass through firewalls
that do not allow FTP at all, but offer a HTTP
proxy.
In this case, you have to specify the proxy in
addition to the FTP server.For a proxy FTP server, you should usually give the name of the
server you really want as a part of the username, after an
@ sign. The proxy server then fakes
the real server. For example, assuming you want to install from
ftp.FreeBSD.org, using the proxy FTP
server foo.example.com, listening on port
1024.In this case, you go to the options menu, set the FTP username
to ftp@ftp.FreeBSD.org, and the password to your
email address. As your installation media, you specify FTP (or
passive FTP, if the proxy supports it), and the URL
ftp://foo.example.com:1234/pub/FreeBSD.Since /pub/FreeBSD from
ftp.FreeBSD.org is proxied under
foo.example.com, you are able to install
from that machine (which will fetch the files
from ftp.FreeBSD.org as your
installation requests them).Committing to the InstallationThe installation can now proceed if desired. This is also
the last chance for aborting the installation to prevent changes
to the hard drive. User Confirmation Requested
Last Chance! Are you SURE you want to continue the installation?
If you're running this on a disk with data you wish to save then WE
STRONGLY ENCOURAGE YOU TO MAKE PROPER BACKUPS before proceeding!
We can take no responsibility for lost disk contents!
[ Yes ] NoSelect [ Yes ] and press
Enter to proceed.The installation time will vary according to the distribution
chosen, installation media used, and the speed of the computer.
There will be a series of
messages displayed indicating the status.The installation is complete when the following message is
displayed: Message
Congratulations! You now have FreeBSD installed on your system.
We will now move on to the final configuration questions.
For any option you do not wish to configure, simply select No.
If you wish to re-enter this utility after the system is up, you may
do so by typing: /stand/sysinstall .
[ OK ]
[ Press enter to continue ]Press Enter to proceed with post-installation
configurations.Selecting [ No ] and pressing
Enter will abort
the installation so no changes will be made to your system. The
following message will appear: Message
Installation complete with some errors. You may wish to scroll
through the debugging messages on VTY1 with the scroll-lock feature.
You can also choose "No" at the next prompt and go back into the
installation menus to try and retry whichever operations have failed.
[ OK ]This message is generated because nothing was installed.
Pressing Enter will return to the
Main Installation Menu to exit the installation.Post-installationConfiguration of various options follows the successful
installation. An option can be configured by re-entering the
configuration options before booting the new FreeBSD
system or after installation using
/stand/sysinstall and selecting
Configure.Network Device ConfigurationIf you previously configured PPP for an FTP install, this screen
will not display and can be configured later as described
above.For detailed information on Local Area Networks and
configuring FreeBSD as a gateway/router refer to the tutorial
PPP - Pedantic PPP Primer. User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to configure any Ethernet or SLIP/PPP network devices?
[ Yes ] NoTo configure a network device, select
[ Yes ] and press Enter.
Otherwise, select [ No ] to continue.Selecting An Ethernet DeviceSelect the interface to be configured with the arrow keys and press
Enter. User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to try IPv6 configuration of the interface?
Yes [ No ]In this private local area network the current Internet
type protocol (IPv4) was sufficient and [ No ]
was selected with the arrow keys and Enter
pressed.If you want to try the new Internet protocol (IPv6), choose
[ Yes ] and press Enter.
It will take several seconds to scan for RA servers. User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to try DHCP configuration of the interface?
Yes [ No ]If DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not required
select [ No ] with the arrow keys and press
Enter.Selecting [ Yes ] will execute
dhclient, and if successful, will fill
in the network configuration information automatically. Refer to
for more information.The following Network Configuration screen shows the
configuration of the Ethernet device for a system that will act
as the gateway for a Local Area Network.Set Network Configuration For ed0Use Tab to select the information fields and
fill in appropriate information:HostThe fully-qualified hostname, e.g. k6-2.example.com in
this case.DomainThe name of the domain that your machine is
in, e.g. example.com for this case.IPv4 GatewayIP address of host forwarding packets to non-local
destinations. Fill this in only if the machine is a node
on the network. Leave this field blank
if the machine is the gateway to the Internet for the
network.Name serverIP address of your local DNS server. There is no local
DNS server on this private local area network so the IP
address of the provider's DNS server (208.163.10.2) was
used.IPv4 addressThe IP address to be used for this interface was
192.168.0.1NetmaskThe address block being used for this local area
network is a Class C block (192.168.0.0 -
192.168.255.255). The default netmask is for a Class C
network (255.255.255.0).Extra options to ifconfigAny interface-specific options to ifconfig
you would like to add. There were none in this case.Use Tab to select &gui.ok;
when finished and press Enter. User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to Bring Up the ed0 interface right now?
[ Yes ] NoChoosing [ Yes ] and pressing
Enter will bring
the machine up on the network and be ready for use after leaving
the installation.Configure Gateway User Confirmation Requested
Do you want this machine to function as a network gateway?
[ Yes ] NoIf the machine will be acting as the gateway for a local area
network and forwarding packets between other machines then select
[ Yes ] and press Enter.
If the machine is a node on a network then
select [ No ] and press
Enter to continue.Configure Internet Services User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to configure inetd and simple network services?
Yes [ No ]If [ No ] is selected, various services
such telnetd will not be enabled. This
means that remote users will not be able to
telnet into this machine. Local users
will be still be able to access remote machines with
telnet.These services can be enabled after installation by editing
/etc/inetd.conf with your favorite text editor.
See for more information.Select [ Yes ] if you wish to
configure these services during install. An additional
confirmation will display: User Confirmation Requested
The Internet Super Server (inetd) allows a number of simple Internet
services to be enabled, including finger, ftp and telnetd. Enabling
these services may increase risk of security problems by increasing
the exposure of your system.
With this in mind, do you wish to enable inetd?
[ Yes ] NoSelect [ Yes ] to continue. User Confirmation Requested
inetd(8) relies on its configuration file, /etc/inetd.conf, to determine
which of its Internet services will be available. The default FreeBSD
inetd.conf(5) leaves all services disabled by default, so they must be
specifically enabled in the configuration file before they will
function, even once inetd(8) is enabled. Note that services for
IPv6 must be seperately enabled from IPv4 services.
Select [Yes] now to invoke an editor on /etc/inetd.conf, or [No] to
use the current settings.
[ Yes ] NoSelecting [ Yes ] will allow adding
services by deleting the # at the beginning
of a line.Editing inetd.confAfter adding the desired services, pressing Esc
will display a menu which will allow exiting and saving
the changes.Anonymous FTP User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to have anonymous FTP access to this machine?
Yes [ No ]Deny Anonymous FTPSelecting the default [ No ] and pressing
Enter will still allow users who have accounts
with passwords to use FTP to access the machine.Allow Anonymous FTPAnyone can access your machine if you elect to allow
anonymous FTP connections. The security implications should be
considered before enabling this option. For more information
about security see .To allow anonymous FTP, use the arrow keys to select
[ Yes ] and press Enter.
The following screen (or similar) will display:Default Anonymous FTP ConfigurationPressing F1 will display the help:This screen allows you to configure the anonymous FTP user.
The following configuration values are editable:
UID: The user ID you wish to assign to the anonymous FTP user.
All files uploaded will be owned by this ID.
Group: Which group you wish the anonymous FTP user to be in.
Comment: String describing this user in /etc/passwd
FTP Root Directory:
Where files available for anonymous FTP will be kept.
Upload subdirectory:
Where files uploaded by anonymous FTP users will go.The ftp root directory will be put in /var
by default. If you do not have enough room there for the
anticipated FTP needs, the /usr directory
could be used by setting the FTP Root Directory to
/usr/ftp.When you are satisfied with the values, press
Enter to continue. User Confirmation Requested
Create a welcome message file for anonymous FTP users?
[ Yes ] NoIf you select [ Yes ] and press
Enter, an editor will automatically start
allowing you to edit the message.Edit The FTP Welcome MessageThis is a text editor called ee. Use the
instructions to change the message or change the message later
using a text editor of your choice. Note the file name/location
at the bottom of the editor screen.Press Esc and a pop-up menu will default
to a) leave editor. Press
Enter to exit and continue.Configure Network File ServicesNetwork File Services (NFS) allows sharing of files across a
network. A machine can be configured as a server, a client, or
both. Refer to for a more information.NFS Server User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to configure this machine as an NFS server?
Yes [ No ]If there is no need for a Network File System server or
client, select [ No ] and press
Enter.If [ Yes ] is chosen, a message will
pop-up indicating that the exports file must be
created. Message
Operating as an NFS server means that you must first configure an
/etc/exports file to indicate which hosts are allowed certain kinds of
access to your local filesystems.
Press [Enter] now to invoke an editor on /etc/exports
[ OK ]Press Enter to continue. A text editor will
start allowing the exports file to be created
and edited.Editing exportsUse the instructions to add the actual exported filesystems
now or later using a text editor of your choice. Note the
file name/location at the bottom of the editor screen.Press Esc and a pop-up menu will default to
a) leave editor. Press
Enter to exit and continue.NFS Client User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to configure this machine as an NFS client?
Yes [ No ]With the arrow keys, select [ Yes ]
or [ No ] as appropriate and
press Enter.Security ProfileA security profile is a set of
configuration options that attempts to achieve the desired
ratio of security to convenience by enabling and disabling
certain programs and other settings. The more severe the
security profile, the fewer programs will be enabled by
default. This is one of the basic principles of security: do
not run anything except what you must.Please note that the security profile is just a default
setting. All programs can be enabled and disabled after you
have installed FreeBSD by editing or adding the appropriate
line(s) to /etc/rc.conf. For more
information, please see the &man.rc.conf.5; manual
page.The following table describes what each of the security
profiles does. The columns are the choices you have for a
security profile, and the rows are the program or feature that
the profile enables or disables.
Possible security profilesExtremeModerate&man.sendmail.8;NOYES&man.sshd.8;NOYES&man.portmap.8;NOMAYBE
The portmapper is enabled if the machine has
been configured as an NFS client or server earlier
in the installation.NFS serverNOYES&man.securelevel.8;YES
If you choose a security profile that sets the
securelevel to Extreme or
High, you must be aware of the
implications. Please read the &man.init.8;
manual page and pay particular attention to the
meanings of the security levels, or you may have
significant trouble later!NO
User Confirmation Requested
Do you want to select a default security profile for this host (select
No for "medium" security)?
[ Yes ] NoSelecting [ No ] and pressing
Enter will set the security profile to medium.Selecting [ Yes ] and pressing
Enter will allow selecting a different security
profile.Security Profile OptionsPress F1 to display the help. Press
Enter to return to selection menu.Use the arrow keys to choose Medium
unless your are sure that another level is required for your needs.
With &gui.ok; highlighted, press
Enter.An appropriate confirmation message will display depending on
which security setting was chosen. Message
Moderate security settings have been selected.
Sendmail and SSHd have been enabled, securelevels are
disabled, and NFS server setting have been left intact.
PLEASE NOTE that this still does not save you from having
to properly secure your system in other ways or exercise
due diligence in your administration, this simply picks
a standard set of out-of-box defaults to start with.
To change any of these settings later, edit /etc/rc.conf
[OK] Message
Extreme security settings have been selected.
Sendmail, SSHd, and NFS services have been disabled, and
securelevels have been enabled.
PLEASE NOTE that this still does not save you from having
to properly secure your system in other ways or exercise
due diligence in your administration, this simply picks
a more secure set of out-of-box defaults to start with.
To change any of these settings later, edit /etc/rc.conf
[OK]Press Enter to continue with the
post-installation configuration.The security profile is not a silver bullet! Even if
you use the extreme setting, you need to keep up with
security issues by reading an appropriate mailing
list, using good passwords and passphrases, and
generally adhering to good security practices. It simply
sets up the desired security to convenience ratio out of the
box.System Console SettingsThere are several options available to customize the system
console. User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to customize your system console settings?
[ Yes ] NoTo view and configure the options, select
[ Yes ] and press
Enter.System Console Configuration OptionsA commonly used option is the screen saver. Use the arrow keys
to select Saver and then press
Enter.Screen Saver OptionsSelect the desired screen saver using the arrow keys
and then press Enter. The System Console
Configuration menu will redisplay.The default time interval is 300 seconds. To change the time
interval, select Saver again. At the
Screen Saver Options menu, select Timeout
using the arrow keys and press Enter. A pop-up
menu will appear:Screen Saver TimeoutThe value can be changed, then select &gui.ok;
and press Enter to return to the System Console
Configuration menu.System Console Configuration ExitSelecting Exit and pressing
Enter will continue with the post-installation
configurations.Setting The Time ZoneSetting the time zone for your machine will allow it to
automatically correct for any regional time changes and perform
other time zone related functions properly.The example shown is for a machine located in the Eastern
time zone of the United States. Your selections will vary according
to your geographical location. User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to set this machine's time zone now?
[ Yes ] NoSelect [ Yes ] and press
Enter to set the time zone. User Confirmation Requested
Is this machine's CMOS clock set to UTC? If it is set to local time
or you don't know, please choose NO here!
Yes [ No ]Select [ Yes ]
or [ No ] according to how the machine's
clock is configured and press Enter.Select Your RegionThe appropriate region is selected using the arrow keys
and then press Enter.Select Your CountrySelect the appropriate country using the arrow keys
and press Enter.Select Your Time ZoneThe appropriate time zone is selected using the arrow
keys and pressing Enter. Confirmation
Does the abbreviation 'EDT' look reasonable?
[ Yes ] NoConfirm the abbreviation for the time zone is correct.
If it looks okay, press Enter to continue with
the post-installation configuration.Linux Compatibility User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to enable Linux binary compatibility?
[ Yes ] NoSelecting [ Yes ] and pressing
Enter will allow
running Linux software on FreeBSD. The install will proceed to add
the appropriate packages for Linux compatibility.If installing by FTP, the machine will need to be connected to
the Internet. Sometimes a remote ftp site will not have all the
distributions like the Linux binary compatibility. This can
be installed later if necessary.Mouse SettingsThis option will allow you to cut and paste text in the
console and user programs with a 3-button mouse. If using a 2-button
mouse, refer to manual page, &man.moused.8;, after installation for
details on emulating the 3-button style. This example depicts a
non-USB mouse configuration: User Confirmation Requested
Does this system have a USB mouse attached to it?
Yes [ No ]Select [ Yes ] for a non-USB mouse or
[ No ] for a USB mouse and press
Enter.Select Mouse Protocol TypeUse the arrow keys to select Type and
press Enter.Set Mouse ProtocolThe mouse used in this example is a PS/2 type, so the default
Auto was appropriate. To change protocol,
use the arrow keys to select another option. Ensure that &gui.ok; is
highlighted and press Enter to exit this menu.Configure Mouse PortUse the arrow keys to select Port and
press Enter.Setting The Mouse PortThis system had a PS/2 mouse, so the default
PS/2 was appropriate. To change the port,
use the arrow keys and then press Enter.Enable The Mouse DaemonLast, the mouse daemon is enabled and tested.Test The Mouse DaemonThe cursor moved around the screen so the mouse daemon is
running.Select [ Yes ] to return to the previous
menu then select Exit with the arrow keys
and press Enter to return to continue with the
post-installation configuration.Configure X-ServerIn order to use a graphical user interface such as
KDE, GNOME,
or others, the X server will need to be configured.In order to run XFree86 as a non-root user you will need to
install wrapper. This can be added
from the Package Selection menu.To see whether your video card is supported, check the
XFree86 web site. User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to configure your X server at this time?
[ Yes ] NoIt is necessary to know your monitor specifications and
video card information. Equipment damage can occur if settings
are incorrect. If you do not have this information, select
[ No ] and perform the configuration
after installation when you have the information using
/stand/sysinstall, selecting
Configure and then
XFree86.
If you have graphics card and monitor information, select
[ Yes ] and press Enter
to proceed with configuring the X server.Select Configuration Method MenuThere are several ways to configure the X server.
Use the arrow keys to select one of the methods and press
Enter. Be sure to read all instructions
carefully.The xf86cfg and
xf86cfg -textmode may make the screen
go dark and take a few seconds to start. Be patient.The following will illustrate the use of the
xf86config configuration tool. The
configuration choices you make will depend on the hardware in the
system so your choices will probably be different than those
shown Message
You have configured and been running the mouse daemon.
Choose "/dev/sysmouse" as the mouse port and "SysMouse" or
"MouseSystems" as the mouse protocol in the X configuration utility.
[ OK ]
[ Press enter to continue ]This indicates that the mouse daemon previously configured has been
detected.
Press Enter to continue.Starting xf86config will display
a brief introduction.This program will create a basic XF86Config file, based on menu selections you
make.
The XF86Config file usually resides in /usr/X11R6/etc/X11 or /etc/X11. A sample
XF86Config file is supplied with XFree86; it is configured for a standard
VGA card and monitor with 640x480 resolution. This program will ask for a
pathname when it is ready to write the file.
You can either take the sample XF86Config as a base and edit it for your
configuration, or let this program produce a base XF86Config file for your
configuration and fine-tune it.
Before continuing with this program, make sure you know what video card
you have, and preferably also the chipset it uses and the amount of video
memory on your video card. SuperProbe may be able to help with this.
Press enter to continue, or ctrl-c to abort.Pressing Enter will start the mouse
configuration. Be sure to follow the instructions and use
Mouse Systems as the mouse protocol and
/dev/sysmouse as the mouse port even if
using a PS/2 mouse is shown as an illustration.First specify a mouse protocol type. Choose one from the following list:
1. Microsoft compatible (2-button protocol)
2. Mouse Systems (3-button protocol)
3. Bus Mouse
4. PS/2 Mouse
5. Logitech Mouse (serial, old type, Logitech protocol)
6. Logitech MouseMan (Microsoft compatible)
7. MM Series
8. MM HitTablet
9. Microsoft IntelliMouse
If you have a two-button mouse, it is most likely of type 1, and if you have
a three-button mouse, it can probably support both protocol 1 and 2. There are
two main varieties of the latter type: mice with a switch to select the
protocol, and mice that default to 1 and require a button to be held at
boot-time to select protocol 2. Some mice can be convinced to do 2 by sending
a special sequence to the serial port (see the ClearDTR/ClearRTS options).
Enter a protocol number: 2
You have selected a Mouse Systems protocol mouse. If your mouse is normally
in Microsoft-compatible mode, enabling the ClearDTR and ClearRTS options
may cause it to switch to Mouse Systems mode when the server starts.
Please answer the following question with either 'y' or 'n'.
Do you want to enable ClearDTR and ClearRTS? n
You have selected a three-button mouse protocol. It is recommended that you
do not enable Emulate3Buttons, unless the third button doesn't work.
Please answer the following question with either 'y' or 'n'.
Do you want to enable Emulate3Buttons? y
Now give the full device name that the mouse is connected to, for example
/dev/tty00. Just pressing enter will use the default, /dev/mouse.
Mouse device: /dev/sysmouseThe keyboard is the next item to be configured. A generic
101-key model is shown for illustration. Any name may be used
for the variant or simply press Enter to accept
the default value.Please select one of the following keyboard types that is the better
description of your keyboard. If nothing really matches,
choose 1 (Generic 101-key PC)
1 Generic 101-key PC
2 Generic 102-key (Intl) PC
3 Generic 104-key PC
4 Generic 105-key (Intl) PC
5 Dell 101-key PC
6 Everex STEPnote
7 Keytronic FlexPro
8 Microsoft Natural
9 Northgate OmniKey 101
10 Winbook Model XP5
11 Japanese 106-key
12 PC-98xx Series
13 Brazilian ABNT2
14 HP Internet
15 Logitech iTouch
16 Logitech Cordless Desktop Pro
17 Logitech Internet Keyboard
18 Logitech Internet Navigator Keyboard
19 Compaq Internet
20 Microsoft Natural Pro
21 Genius Comfy KB-16M
22 IBM Rapid Access
23 IBM Rapid Access II
24 Chicony Internet Keyboard
25 Dell Internet Keyboard
Enter a number to choose the keyboard.
1
Please select the layout corresponding to your keyboard
1 U.S. English
2 U.S. English w/ ISO9995-3
3 U.S. English w/ deadkeys
4 Albanian
5 Arabic
6 Armenian
7 Azerbaidjani
8 Belarusian
9 Belgian
10 Bengali
11 Brazilian
12 Bulgarian
13 Burmese
14 Canadian
15 Croatian
16 Czech
17 Czech (qwerty)
18 Danish
Enter a number to choose the country.
Press enter for the next page
1
Please enter a variant name for 'us' layout. Or just press enter
for default variant
us
Please answer the following question with either 'y' or 'n'.
Do you want to select additional XKB options (group switcher,
group indicator, etc.)? nNext, we proceed to the configuration for the monitor. Do not
exceed the ratings of your monitor. Damage could occur. If you
have any doubts, do the configuration after you have the
information.Now we want to set the specifications of the monitor. The two critical
parameters are the vertical refresh rate, which is the rate at which the
-the whole screen is refreshed, and most importantly the horizontal sync rate,
+whole screen is refreshed, and most importantly the horizontal sync rate,
which is the rate at which scanlines are displayed.
The valid range for horizontal sync and vertical sync should be documented
in the manual of your monitor. If in doubt, check the monitor database
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/doc/Monitors to see if your monitor is there.
Press enter to continue, or ctrl-c to abort.
You must indicate the horizontal sync range of your monitor. You can either
select one of the predefined ranges below that correspond to industry-
standard monitor types, or give a specific range.
It is VERY IMPORTANT that you do not specify a monitor type with a horizontal
sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor. If in doubt,
choose a conservative setting.
hsync in kHz; monitor type with characteristic modes
1 31.5; Standard VGA, 640x480 @ 60 Hz
2 31.5 - 35.1; Super VGA, 800x600 @ 56 Hz
3 31.5, 35.5; 8514 Compatible, 1024x768 @ 87 Hz interlaced (no 800x600)
4 31.5, 35.15, 35.5; Super VGA, 1024x768 @ 87 Hz interlaced, 800x600 @ 56 Hz
5 31.5 - 37.9; Extended Super VGA, 800x600 @ 60 Hz, 640x480 @ 72 Hz
6 31.5 - 48.5; Non-Interlaced SVGA, 1024x768 @ 60 Hz, 800x600 @ 72 Hz
7 31.5 - 57.0; High Frequency SVGA, 1024x768 @ 70 Hz
8 31.5 - 64.3; Monitor that can do 1280x1024 @ 60 Hz
9 31.5 - 79.0; Monitor that can do 1280x1024 @ 74 Hz
10 31.5 - 82.0; Monitor that can do 1280x1024 @ 76 Hz
11 Enter your own horizontal sync range
Enter your choice (1-11): 6
You must indicate the vertical sync range of your monitor. You can either
select one of the predefined ranges below that correspond to industry-
standard monitor types, or give a specific range. For interlaced modes,
the number that counts is the high one (e.g. 87 Hz rather than 43 Hz).
1 50-70
2 50-90
3 50-100
4 40-150
5 Enter your own vertical sync range
Enter your choice: 2
You must now enter a few identification/description strings, namely an
identifier, a vendor name, and a model name. Just pressing enter will fill
in default names.
The strings are free-form, spaces are allowed.
Enter an identifier for your monitor definition: HitachiThe selection of a video card driver from a list is
next. If you pass your card on the list, continue to press
Enter and the list will repeat. Only an
excerpt from the list is shown.Now we must configure video card specific settings. At this point you can
choose to make a selection out of a database of video card definitions.
Because there can be variation in Ramdacs and clock generators even
between cards of the same model, it is not sensible to blindly copy
the settings (e.g. a Device section). For this reason, after you make a
selection, you will still be asked about the components of the card, with
the settings from the chosen database entry presented as a strong hint.
The database entries include information about the chipset, what driver to
run, the Ramdac and ClockChip, and comments that will be included in the
Device section. However, a lot of definitions only hint about what driver
to run (based on the chipset the card uses) and are untested.
If you can't find your card in the database, there's nothing to worry about.
You should only choose a database entry that is exactly the same model as
your card; choosing one that looks similar is just a bad idea (e.g. a
GemStone Snail 64 may be as different from a GemStone Snail 64+ in terms of
hardware as can be).
Do you want to look at the card database? y
288 Matrox Millennium G200 8MB mgag200
289 Matrox Millennium G200 SD 16MB mgag200
290 Matrox Millennium G200 SD 4MB mgag200
291 Matrox Millennium G200 SD 8MB mgag200
292 Matrox Millennium G400 mgag400
293 Matrox Millennium II 16MB mga2164w
294 Matrox Millennium II 4MB mga2164w
295 Matrox Millennium II 8MB mga2164w
296 Matrox Mystique mga1064sg
297 Matrox Mystique G200 16MB mgag200
298 Matrox Mystique G200 4MB mgag200
299 Matrox Mystique G200 8MB mgag200
300 Matrox Productiva G100 4MB mgag100
301 Matrox Productiva G100 8MB mgag100
302 MediaGX mediagx
303 MediaVision Proaxcel 128 ET6000
304 Mirage Z-128 ET6000
305 Miro CRYSTAL VRX Verite 1000
Enter a number to choose the corresponding card definition.
Press enter for the next page, q to continue configuration.
288
Your selected card definition:
Identifier: Matrox Millennium G200 8MB
Chipset: mgag200
Driver: mga
Do NOT probe clocks or use any Clocks line.
Press enter to continue, or ctrl-c to abort.
Now you must give information about your video card. This will be used for
the "Device" section of your video card in XF86Config.
You must indicate how much video memory you have. It is probably a good
idea to use the same approximate amount as that detected by the server you
intend to use. If you encounter problems that are due to the used server
not supporting the amount memory you have (e.g. ATI Mach64 is limited to
1024K with the SVGA server), specify the maximum amount supported by the
server.
How much video memory do you have on your video card:
1 256K
2 512K
3 1024K
4 2048K
5 4096K
6 Other
Enter your choice: 6
Amount of video memory in Kbytes: 8192
You must now enter a few identification/description strings, namely an
identifier, a vendor name, and a model name. Just pressing enter will fill
in default names (possibly from a card definition).
Your card definition is Matrox Millennium G200 8MB.
The strings are free-form, spaces are allowed.
Enter an identifier for your video card definition:Next, the video modes are set for the resolutions
desired. Typically, useful ranges are 640x480, 800x600, and 1024x768
but those are a function of video card capability, monitor size,
and eye comfort. When selecting a color depth, select the highest
mode that your card will support.For each depth, a list of modes (resolutions) is defined. The default
resolution that the server will start-up with will be the first listed
mode that can be supported by the monitor and card.
Currently it is set to:
"640x480" "800x600" "1024x768" "1280x1024" for 8-bit
"640x480" "800x600" "1024x768" "1280x1024" for 16-bit
"640x480" "800x600" "1024x768" "1280x1024" for 24-bit
Modes that cannot be supported due to monitor or clock constraints will
be automatically skipped by the server.
1 Change the modes for 8-bit (256 colors)
2 Change the modes for 16-bit (32K/64K colors)
3 Change the modes for 24-bit (24-bit color)
4 The modes are OK, continue.
Enter your choice: 2
Select modes from the following list:
1 "640x400"
2 "640x480"
3 "800x600"
4 "1024x768"
5 "1280x1024"
6 "320x200"
7 "320x240"
8 "400x300"
9 "1152x864"
a "1600x1200"
b "1800x1400"
c "512x384"
Please type the digits corresponding to the modes that you want to select.
For example, 432 selects "1024x768" "800x600" "640x480", with a
default mode of 1024x768.
Which modes? 432
You can have a virtual screen (desktop), which is screen area that is larger
than the physical screen and which is panned by moving the mouse to the edge
of the screen. If you don't want virtual desktop at a certain resolution,
you cannot have modes listed that are larger. Each color depth can have a
differently-sized virtual screen
Please answer the following question with either 'y' or 'n'.
Do you want a virtual screen that is larger than the physical screen? n
For each depth, a list of modes (resolutions) is defined. The default
resolution that the server will start-up with will be the first listed
mode that can be supported by the monitor and card.
Currently it is set to:
"640x480" "800x600" "1024x768" "1280x1024" for 8-bit
"1024x768" "800x600" "640x480" for 16-bit
"640x480" "800x600" "1024x768" "1280x1024" for 24-bit
Modes that cannot be supported due to monitor or clock constraints will
be automatically skipped by the server.
1 Change the modes for 8-bit (256 colors)
2 Change the modes for 16-bit (32K/64K colors)
3 Change the modes for 24-bit (24-bit color)
4 The modes are OK, continue.
Enter your choice: 4
Please specify which color depth you want to use by default:
1 1 bit (monochrome)
2 4 bits (16 colors)
3 8 bits (256 colors)
4 16 bits (65536 colors)
5 24 bits (16 million colors)
Enter a number to choose the default depth.
4Finally, the configuration needs to be saved. Be sure
to enter /etc/XF86Config as the location
for saving the configuration.I am going to write the XF86Config file now. Make sure you don't accidently
overwrite a previously configured one.
Shall I write it to /etc/X11/XF86Config? n
Please answer the following question with either a 'y' or 'n'.
Shall I write it to the default location, /usr/X11R6/etc/X11/XF86Config? n
Do you want it written to the current directory as 'XF86Config'? n
Please give a filename to write to: /etc/XF86ConfigIf the configuration fails, you can try the configuration again
by selecting [ Yes ] when the following
message appears: User Confirmation Requested
The XFree86 configuration process seems to have
failed. Would you like to try again?
[ Yes ] NoIf you have trouble configuring XFree86, select
[ No ] and press Enter
and continue with the installation process. After installation
you can use xf86cfg -textmode or
xf86config to access the command line
configuration utilities as root. There is
an additional method for configuring XFree86 described in
. If you choose not to configure
XFree86 at this time the next menu will be for package
selection.The default setting which allows the server to be killed
is the hotkey sequence CtrlAltBackspace. This
can be executed if something is wrong with the server settings and
prevent hardware damage.The default setting that allows video mode switching will
permit changing of the mode while running X with the hotkey
sequence
CtrlAlt+ or
CtrlAlt-.
After installation, the display can be adjusted for height,
width, or centering by using xvidtune
after you have XFree86 running with
xvidtune.There are warnings that improper settings can
damage your equipment. Heed them. If in doubt, do not do
it. Instead, use the monitor controls to adjust the display for
X Window. There may be some display differences when switching
back to text mode, but it is better than damaging equipment.Read the &man.xvidtune.1; man page before making
any adjustments.Following a successful XFree86 configuration, it will proceed
to the selection of a default desktop.Select Default X DesktopThere are a variety of window managers available. They range
from very basic environments to full desktop environments with a
large suite of software. Some require only minimal disk space and
low memory while others with more features require much more. The
best way to determine which is most suitable for you is to try a few
different ones. Those are available from the ports collection or as
packages and can be added after installation.You can select one of the popular desktops to be installed
and configured as the default desktop. This will allow you
to start it right after installation.Select Default DesktopUse the arrow keys to select a desktop and press
Enter. Installation of the selected desktop will
proceed.Install PackagesThe packages are pre-compiled binaries and are a convenient
way to install software.Installation of one package is shown for purposes of
illustration. Additional packages can also be added at this
time if desired. After installation
/stand/sysinstall can be used to add additional
packages. User Confirmation Requested
The FreeBSD package collection is a collection of hundreds of
ready-to-run applications, from text editors to games to WEB servers
and more. Would you like to browse the collection now?
[ Yes ] NoSelecting [ Yes ] and pressing
Enter will be
followed by the Package Selection screens:Select Package CategoryAll packages available will be displayed if
All is selected or you can select a
particular category. Highlight your selection with the arrow
keys and press Enter.This is a good time to install
wrapper in order to run XFree86
as a user.A menu will display showing all the packages available for
the selection made:Select PackagesThe bash shell is shown selected.
Select as many as desired by highlighting the package and pressing the
Space key. A short description of each package will
appear in the lower left corner of the screen.Pressing the Tab key will toggle between the last
selected package, &gui.ok;, and &gui.cancel;.When you have finished marking the packages for installation,
press Tab once to toggle to the &gui.ok; and press
Enter to return to the Package Selection menu.The left and right arrow keys will also toggle between &gui.ok;
and &gui.cancel;. This method can also be used to select &gui.ok; and
press Enter to return to the Package Selection
menu.Install PackagesUse the arrow keys to select [ Install ]
and press Enter. You will then need to confirm
that you want to install the packages:Confirm Package InstallationSelecting &gui.ok; and pressing Enter will start
the package installation. Installing messages will appear until
completed. Make note if there are any error messages.The final configuration continues after packages are
installed.Add Users/GroupsYou should add at least one user during the installation so
that you can use the system without being logged in as
root. The root partition is generally small
and running applications as root can quickly
fill it. A bigger danger is noted below: User Confirmation Requested
Would you like to add any initial user accounts to the system? Adding
at least one account for yourself at this stage is suggested since
working as the "root" user is dangerous (it is easy to do things which
adversely affect the entire system).
[ Yes ] NoSelect [ Yes ] and press
Enter to continue with adding a user.Select Add UserSelect Add User with the arrow keys
and press Enter.Add User InformationThe following descriptions will appear in the lower part of
the screen as the items are selected with Tab
to assist with entering the required information:Login IDThe login name of the new user (mandatory)UIDThe numerical ID for this user (leave blank for
automatic choice)GroupThe login group name for this user (leave blank for
automatic choice)PasswordThe password for this user (enter this field with
care!)Full nameThe user's full name (comment)Member groupsThe groups this user belongs to (i.e. gets access
rights for)Home directoryThe user's home directory (leave blank for
default)Login shellThe user's login shell (leave blank for
default). (/bin/sh)The login shell was changed from /bin/sh to
/usr/local/bin/bash to use the
bash shell that was previously installed as
a package. Do not try to use a shell that does not exist or you will
not be able to login.The user was also added to the group wheel
to be able to become a superuser with root
privileges.When you are satisfied, press &gui.ok; and
the User and Group Management menu will redisplay:Exit User and Group ManagementGroups could also be added at this time if specific needs
are known. Otherwise, this may be accessed through using
/stand/sysinstall after installation is
completed.When you are finished adding users, select
Exit with the arrow keys and press
Enter to continue the installation.Set root Password Message
Now you must set the system manager's password.
This is the password you'll use to log in as "root".
[ OK ]
[ Press enter to continue ]Press Enter to set the root
password.The password will need to be typed in twice correctly. Needless to
say, make sure you have a way of finding the password if you
forget.Changing local password for root.
New password :
Retype new password :The installation will continue after the password is
successfully entered.Exiting InstallIf you need to configure additional network devices or to
do any other configurations, you can do it at this point or
after installation with /stand/sysinstall. User Confirmation Requested
Visit the general configuration menu for a chance to set any last
options?
Yes [ No ]Select [ No ] with the arrow keys
and press Enter to return to the Main
Installation Menu.Exit InstallSelect [X Exit Install] with the arrow
keys and press Enter. You will be asked to
confirm exiting the installation: User Confirmation Requested
Are you sure you wish to exit? The system will reboot (be sure to
remove any floppies from the drives).
[ Yes ] NoSelect [ Yes ] and remove the floppy if
booting from the floppy. The CDROM drive is locked until the machine
starts to reboot. The CDROM drive is then unlocked and the disk can
be removed from drive (quickly).The system will reboot so watch for any error messages that
may appear.FreeBSD BootupFreeBSD Bootup on the i386If everything went well, you will see messages scroll
off the screen and you will arrive at a login prompt. You can view
the content of the messages by pressing Scroll-Lock
and using PgUp and PgDn.
Pressing Scroll-Lock again will return
to the prompt.The entire message may not display (buffer limitation) but
it can be viewed from the command line after logging in by typing
dmesg at the prompt.Login using the username/password you set during installation
(rpratt, in this example). Avoid logging in as
root except when necessary.Typical boot messages:Copyright (c) 1992-2002 The FreeBSD Project.
Copyright (c) 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
FreeBSD 4.6-RC2 #0: Sat May 18 05:10:05 GMT 2002
root@storm.FreeBSD.org.uk:/usr/src/sys/compile/GENERIC
Timecounter "i8254" frequency 1193182 Hz
CPU: AMD-K6(tm) 3D processor (300.68-MHz 586-class CPU)
Origin = "AuthenticAMD" Id = 0x580 Stepping = 0
Features=0x8001bf<FPU,VME,DE,PSE,TSC,MSR,MCE,CX8,MMX>
AMD Features=0x80000800<SYSCALL,3DNow!>
real memory = 268435456 (262144K bytes)
config> di sn0
config> di lnc0
config> di le0
config> di ie0
config> di fe0
config> di cs0
config> di bt0
config> di aic0
config> di aha0
config> di adv0
config> q
avail memory = 256311296 (250304K bytes)
Preloaded elf kernel "kernel" at 0xc0491000.
Preloaded userconfig_script "/boot/kernel.conf" at 0xc049109c.
md0: Malloc disk
Using $PIR table, 4 entries at 0xc00fde60
npx0: <math processor> on motherboard
npx0: INT 16 interface
pcib0: <Host to PCI bridge> on motherboard
pci0: <PCI bus> on pcib0
pcib1: <VIA 82C598MVP (Apollo MVP3) PCI-PCI (AGP) bridge> at device 1.0 on pci0
pci1: <PCI bus> on pcib1
pci1: <Matrox MGA G200 AGP graphics accelerator> at 0.0 irq 11
isab0: <VIA 82C586 PCI-ISA bridge> at device 7.0 on pci0
isa0: <ISA bus> on isab0
atapci0: <VIA 82C586 ATA33 controller> port 0xe000-0xe00f at device 7.1 on pci0
ata0: at 0x1f0 irq 14 on atapci0
ata1: at 0x170 irq 15 on atapci0
uhci0: <VIA 83C572 USB controller> port 0xe400-0xe41f irq 10 at device 7.2 on pci0
usb0: <VIA 83C572 USB controller> on uhci0
usb0: USB revision 1.0
uhub0: VIA UHCI root hub, class 9/0, rev 1.00/1.00, addr 1
uhub0: 2 ports with 2 removable, self powered
chip1: <VIA 82C586B ACPI interface> at device 7.3 on pci0
ed0: <NE2000 PCI Ethernet (RealTek 8029)> port 0xe800-0xe81f irq 9 at
device 10.0 on pci0
ed0: address 52:54:05:de:73:1b, type NE2000 (16 bit)
isa0: too many dependant configs (8)
isa0: unexpected small tag 14
fdc0: <NEC 72065B or clone> at port 0x3f0-0x3f5,0x3f7 irq 6 drq 2 on isa0
fdc0: FIFO enabled, 8 bytes threshold
fd0: <1440-KB 3.5" drive> on fdc0 drive 0
atkbdc0: <keyboard controller (i8042)> at port 0x60-0x64 on isa0
atkbd0: <AT Keyboard> flags 0x1 irq 1 on atkbdc0
kbd0 at atkbd0
psm0: <PS/2 Mouse> irq 12 on atkbdc0
psm0: model Generic PS/2 mouse, device ID 0
vga0: <Generic ISA VGA> at port 0x3c0-0x3df iomem 0xa0000-0xbffff on isa0
sc0: <System console> at flags 0x1 on isa0
sc0: VGA <16 virtual consoles, flags=0x300>
sio0 at port 0x3f8-0x3ff irq 4 flags 0x10 on isa0
sio0: type 16550A
sio1 at port 0x2f8-0x2ff irq 3 on isa0
sio1: type 16550A
ppc0: <Parallel port> at port 0x378-0x37f irq 7 on isa0
ppc0: SMC-like chipset (ECP/EPP/PS2/NIBBLE) in COMPATIBLE mode
ppc0: FIFO with 16/16/15 bytes threshold
ppbus0: IEEE1284 device found /NIBBLE
Probing for PnP devices on ppbus0:
plip0: <PLIP network interface> on ppbus0
lpt0: <Printer> on ppbus0
lpt0: Interrupt-driven port
ppi0: <Parallel I/O> on ppbus0
ad0: 8063MB <IBM-DHEA-38451> [16383/16/63] at ata0-master using UDMA33
ad2: 8063MB <IBM-DHEA-38451> [16383/16/63] at ata1-master using UDMA33
acd0: CDROM <DELTA OTC-H101/ST3 F/W by OIPD> at ata0-slave using PIO4
Mounting root from ufs:/dev/ad0s1a
swapon: adding /dev/ad0s1b as swap device
Automatic boot in progress...
/dev/ad0s1a: FILESYSTEM CLEAN; SKIPPING CHECKS
/dev/ad0s1a: clean, 48752 free (552 frags, 6025 blocks, 0.9% fragmentation)
/dev/ad0s1f: FILESYSTEM CLEAN; SKIPPING CHECKS
/dev/ad0s1f: clean, 128997 free (21 frags, 16122 blocks, 0.0% fragmentation)
/dev/ad0s1g: FILESYSTEM CLEAN; SKIPPING CHECKS
/dev/ad0s1g: clean, 3036299 free (43175 frags, 374073 blocks, 1.3% fragmentation)
/dev/ad0s1e: filesystem CLEAN; SKIPPING CHECKS
/dev/ad0s1e: clean, 128193 free (17 frags, 16022 blocks, 0.0% fragmentation)
Doing initial network setup: hostname.
ed0: flags=8843<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
inet 192.168.0.1 netmask 0xffffff00 broadcast 192.168.0.255
inet6 fe80::5054::5ff::fede:731b%ed0 prefixlen 64 tentative scopeid 0x1
ether 52:54:05:de:73:1b
lo0: flags=8049<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING,MULTICAST> mtu 16384
inet6 fe80::1%lo0 prefixlen 64 scopeid 0x8
inet6 ::1 prefixlen 128
inet 127.0.0.1 netmask 0xff000000
Additional routing options: IP gateway=YES TCP keepalive=YES
routing daemons:.
additional daemons: syslogd.
Doing additional network setup:.
Starting final network daemons: creating ssh RSA host key
Generating public/private rsa1 key pair.
Your identification has been saved in /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key.
Your public key has been saved in /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key.pub.
The key fingerprint is:
cd:76:89:16:69:0e:d0:6e:f8:66:d0:07:26:3c:7e:2d root@k6-2.example.com
creating ssh DSA host key
Generating public/private dsa key pair.
Your identification has been saved in /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key.
Your public key has been saved in /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key.pub.
The key fingerprint is:
f9:a1:a9:47:c4:ad:f9:8d:52:b8:b8:ff:8c:ad:2d:e6 root@k6-2.example.com.
setting ELF ldconfig path: /usr/lib /usr/lib/compat /usr/X11R6/lib
/usr/local/lib
a.out ldconfig path: /usr/lib/aout /usr/lib/compat/aout /usr/X11R6/lib/aout
starting standard daemons: inetd cron sshd usbd sendmail.
Initial rc.i386 initialization:.
rc.i386 configuring syscons: blank_time screensaver moused.
Additional ABI support: linux.
Local package initilization:.
Additional TCP options:.
FreeBSD/i386 (k6-2.example.com) (ttyv0)
login: rpratt
Password:Generating the RSA and DSA keys may take some time on slower
machines. This happens only on the initial boot-up of a new
installation. Subsequent boots will be faster.If the X server has been configured and a Default Desktop
chosen, it can be started by typing startx at
the command line.Bootup of FreeBSD on the AlphaAlphaOnce the install procedure has finished, you will be
able to start FreeBSD by typing something like this to the
SRM prompt:>>>BOOT DKC0This instructs the firmware to boot the specified
disk. To make FreeBSD boot automatically in the future, use
these commands:>>>SET BOOT_OSFLAGS A>>>SET BOOT_FILE ''>>>SET BOOTDEF_DEV DKC0>>>SET AUTO_ACTION BOOTThe boot messages will be similar (but not identical) to
those produced by FreeBSD booting on the i386.FreeBSD ShutdownIt is important to properly shutdown the operating
system. Do not just turn off power. First, become a superuser by
typing su at the command line and entering the
root password. This will work only if the user
is a member of the group wheel. Otherwise, login as
root and use
shutdown -h now.The operating system has halted.
Please press any key to reboot.It is safe to turn off the power after the shutdown command
has been issued and the message Please press any key to reboot
appears. If any key is pressed instead of turning off the power
switch, the system will reboot.You could also use the
CtrlAltDel
key combination to reboot the system, however this is not recommended
during normal operation.Supported HardwarehardwareFreeBSD currently runs on a wide variety of ISA, VLB, EISA, and PCI
bus-based PCs with Intel, AMD, Cyrix, or NexGen x86
processors, as well as a number of machines based on the Compaq Alpha
processor. Support for generic IDE or ESDI drive configurations,
various SCSI controllers, PCMCIA cards, USB devices, and network and
serial cards is also provided. FreeBSD also supports IBM's microchannel
(MCA) bus.A list of supported hardware is provided with each FreeBSD release
in the FreeBSD Hardware Notes. This document can usually be found in a
file named HARDWARE.TXT, in the top-level directory
of a CDROM or FTP distribution or in
sysinstall's documentation menu. It lists,
for a given architecture, what hardware devices are known to be
supported by each release of FreeBSD.TroubleshootinginstallationtroubleshootingThe following section covers basic installation troubleshooting,
such as common problems people have reported. There are also a few
questions and answers for people wishing to dual-boot FreeBSD with
MS-DOS.What to Do If Something Goes WrongDue to various limitations of the PC architecture, it is
impossible for probing to be 100% reliable, however, there are a
few things you can do if it fails.Check the Hardware Notes document for your version of
FreeBSD to make sure your hardware is
supported.If your hardware is supported and you still experience
lock-ups or other problems, reset your computer, and when the
visual kernel configuration option is given, choose it. This will
allow you to go through your hardware and supply information to the
system about it. The kernel on the boot disks is configured
assuming that most hardware devices are in their factory default
configuration in terms of IRQs, IO addresses, and DMA channels. If
your hardware has been reconfigured, you will most likely need to
use the configuration editor to tell FreeBSD where to find
things.It is also possible that a probe for a device not present will
cause a later probe for another device that is present to fail. In
that case, the probes for the conflicting driver(s) should be
disabled.Some installation problems can be avoided or alleviated
by updating the firmware on various hardware components, most notably
the motherboard. The motherboard firmware may also be referred to
as BIOS and most of the motherboard or computer
manufactures have a website where the upgrades and upgrade information
may be located.Most manufacturers strongly advise against upgrading the motherboard
BIOS unless there is a good reason for doing so, which
could possibly be a critical update of sorts. The upgrade process
can go wrong, causing permanent damage to the
BIOS chip.Do not disable any drivers you will need during the
installation, such as your screen (sc0).
If the installation wedges or fails mysteriously after leaving
the configuration editor, you have probably removed or changed
something you should not have. Reboot and try again.In configuration mode, you can:List the device drivers installed in the kernel.Disable device drivers for hardware that is not present in
your system.Change IRQs, DRQs, and IO port addresses used by a device
driver.After adjusting the kernel to match your hardware
configuration, type Q to boot with the new
settings. Once the installation has completed, any changes you
made in the configuration mode will be permanent so you do not have
to reconfigure every time you boot. It is still highly likely that
you will eventually want to build a custom kernel.MS-DOS User's Questions and AnswersDOSMany users wish to install FreeBSD on PCs inhabited by MS-DOS.
Here are some commonly asked questions about installing FreeBSD on
such systems:Help, I have no space! Do I need to delete everything
first?If your machine is already running MS-DOS and has little
or no free space available for the FreeBSD installation, all
hope is not lost! You may find the FIPS
utility, provided
in the tools directory on the FreeBSD
CDROM or various FreeBSD FTP sites to be quite
useful.FIPSFIPS allows you to split an
existing MS-DOS partition into two pieces, preserving the
original partition and allowing you to install onto the second
free piece. You first defragment your MS-DOS partition using
the Windows DEFRAG utility (go into
Explorer, right-click on the hard drive, and choose to defrag
your hard drive), or Norton Disk Tools. You then must run
FIPS. It will prompt you for the
rest of the information it needs. Afterwards, you can reboot
and install FreeBSD on the new free slice. See the
Distributions menu for an estimate of how
much free space you will need for the kind of installation you
want.Partition MagicThere is also a very useful product
from PowerQuest
called Partition Magic. This
application has far more functionality than
FIPS, and is highly recommended if
you plan to often add/remove operating systems (like me).
However, it does cost money, and if you plan to install FreeBSD
once and then leave it there, FIPS
will probably be fine for you.Can I use compressed MS-DOS filesystems from
FreeBSD?No. If you are using a utility such as
Stacker or
DoubleSpace, FreeBSD
will only be able to use whatever portion of the filesystem
you leave uncompressed. The rest of the filesystem will
show up as one large file (the stacked/double spaced file!).
Do not remove that file or you will probably regret
it greatly!It is probably better to create another uncompressed
primary MS-DOS partition and use this for communications
between MS-DOS and FreeBSD.Can I mount my extended MS-DOS partition?partitionsslicesYes. DOS extended partitions are mapped in at the end
of the other slices in FreeBSD, e.g., your
D: drive might be
/dev/da0s5, your
E: drive,
/dev/da0s6, and so on. This example
assumes, of course, that your extended partition is on SCSI
drive 0. For IDE drives, substitute ad
for da appropriately if installing
4.0-RELEASE or later, and substitute
wd for da if you
are installing a version of FreeBSD prior to 4.0. You otherwise
mount extended partitions exactly like you would any other
DOS drive, for example:&prompt.root; mount -t msdos /dev/ad0s5 /dos_dAlpha User's Questions and AnswersAlphaThis section answers some commonly asked questions about
installing FreeBSD on Alpha systems.Can I boot from the ARC or Alpha BIOS Console?ARCAlpha BIOSSRMNo. &os;, like Compaq Tru64 and VMS, will only boot
from the SRM console.Help, I have no space! Do I need to delete
everything first?Unfortunately, yes.Can I mount my Compaq Tru64 or VMS filesystems?No, not at this time.ValentinoVaschettoContributed by Advanced Installation GuideThis section describes how to install FreeBSD in exceptional
cases.Installing FreeBSD on a System without a Monitor or
Keyboardinstallationheadless (serial console)serial consoleThis type of installation is called a headless
install, because the machine that you are trying to install
FreeBSD on either does not have a monitor attached to it, or does not
even have a VGA output. How is this possible you ask? Using a
serial console. A serial console is basically using another
machine to act as the main display and keyboard for a
system. To do this, just follow these steps:Fetch the Right Boot Floppy ImagesFirst you will need to get the right disk images so
that you can boot into the install program. The secret
with using a serial console is that you tell the boot
loader to send I/O through a serial port instead of
displaying console output to the VGA device and trying to
read input from a local keyboard. Enough of that now,
let's get back to getting these disk images.You will need to get
kern.flp
and
mfsroot.flp
from the
floppies directory.Write the Image Files to the Floppy DisksThe image files, such as kern.flp, are
not regular files that you copy to the disk.
Instead, they are images of the complete contents of the
disk.This means that you can not use
commands like DOS' copy to write the
files. Instead, you must use specific tools to write the
images directly to the disk.fdimageIf you are creating the floppies on a computer running
DOS then we provide a tool to do this called
fdimage.If you are using the floppies from the CDROM, and
your CDROM is the E: drive then
you would run this:E:\>tools\fdimage floppies\kern.flp A:Repeat this command for each .flp
file, replacing the floppy disk each time. Adjust the
command line as necessary, depending on where you have
placed the .flp files. If you do not
have the CDROM then fdimage can be
downloaded from the tools
directory on the FreeBSD FTP site.If you are writing the floppies on a Unix system (such
as another FreeBSD system) you can use the &man.dd.1;
command to write the image files directly to disk. On
FreeBSD you would run:&prompt.root; dd if=kern.flp of=/dev/fd0On FreeBSD /dev/fd0 refers to
the first floppy disk (the A:
drive). /dev/fd1 would be the
B: drive, and so on. Other Unix
variants might have different names for the floppy disk
devices, and you will need to check the documentation for
the system as necessary.Enabling the Boot Floppies to Boot into a Serial
ConsoleDo not try to mount the floppy if it is write-protectedmountIf you were to boot into the floppies that you just
made, FreeBSD would boot into its normal install mode. We
want FreeBSD to boot into a serial console for our
install. To do this, you have to mount the
kern.flp floppy onto your FreeBSD
system using the &man.mount.8; command.&prompt.root; mount /dev/fd0 /mntNow that you have the floppy mounted, you must
change into the floppy directory&prompt.root; cd /mntHere is where you must set the floppy to boot into a
serial console. You have to make a file called
boot.config containing
/boot/loader -h. All this does is pass a flag to the bootloader to
boot into a serial console.&prompt.root; echo "/boot/loader -h" > boot.configNow that you have your floppy configured correctly,
you must unmount the floppy using the &man.umount.8;
command&prompt.root; cd /
&prompt.root; umount /mntNow you can remove the floppy from the floppy
driveConnecting Your Null Modem Cablenull-modem cableYou now need to connect a null modem cable between
the two machines. Just connect the cable to the serial
ports of the 2 machines. A normal serial cable
will not work here, you need a null modem
cable because it has some of the wires inside crossed
over.Booting Up for the InstallIt is now time to go ahead and start the install. Put
the kern.flp floppy in the floppy
drive of the machine you are doing the headless install
on, and power on the machine.Connecting to Your Headless MachinecuNow you have to connect to that machine with
&man.cu.1;:&prompt.root; cu -l /dev/cuaa0That's it! You should be able to control the headless machine
through your cu session now. It will ask you to
put in the mfsroot.flp, and then it will come up
with a selection of what kind of terminal to use. Just select the
FreeBSD color console and proceed with your install!Preparing Your Own Installation MediaTo prevent repetition, FreeBSD disk in this context
means a FreeBSD CDROM or DVD that you have purchased, or produced
yourself.There may be some situations in which you need to create your own
FreeBSD installation media and/or source. This might be physical media,
such as a tape, or a source that Sysinstall
can use to retrieve the files, such as a local FTP site, or an MS-DOS
partition. For example:You have many machines connected to your local network, and one
FreeBSD disk. You want to create a local FTP site using the
contents of the FreeBSD disk, and then have your machines use this
local FTP site instead of needing to connect to the Internet.You have a FreeBSD disk, FreeBSD does not recognize your CD/DVD
drive, but DOS/Windows does. You want to copy the FreeBSD
installations files to a DOS partition on the same computer, and
then install FreeBSD using those files.The computer you want to install on does not have a CD/DVD
drive, or a network card, but you can connect a
Laplink-style serial or parallel cable to a computer
that does.You want to create a tape that can be used to install
FreeBSD.Creating a Local FTP Site with a FreeBSD DiskinstallationnetworkFTPFreeBSD disks are laid out in the same way as the FTP site. This
makes it very easy for you to create a local FTP site that can be used
by other machines on your network when installing FreeBSD.On the FreeBSD computer that will host the FTP site, ensure
that the CDROM is in the drive, and mounted on
/cdrom.&prompt.root; mount /cdromCreate an account for anonymous FTP in
/etc/passwd. Do this by editing
/etc/passwd using &man.vipw.8; and adding
this line.ftp:*:99:99::0:0:FTP:/cdrom:/nonexistentEnsure that the FTP service is enabled in
/etc/inetd.conf.Anyone with network connectivity to your machine can now
chose a media type of FTP and type in
ftp://your machine
after picking Other in the FTP sites menu during
the install.This approach is OK for a machine that is on your local network,
and that is protected by your firewall. Offering up FTP services to
other machines over the Internet (and not your local network)
exposes your computer to the attention of crackers and other
undesirables. We strongly recommend that you follow good security
practices if you do this.Creating Installation FloppiesinstallationfloppiesIf you must install from floppy disk (which we suggest you
do not do), either due to unsupported
hardware or simply because you insist on doing things the hard
way, you must first prepare some floppies for the installation.At a minimum, you will need as many 1.44MB or 1.2MB floppies
as it takes to hold all the files in the
bin (binary distribution) directory. If
you are preparing the floppies from DOS, then they
MUST be formatted using the MS-DOS
FORMAT command. If you are using Windows,
use Explorer to format the disks (right-click on the
A: drive, and select "Format".Do not trust factory pre-formatted
floppies. Format them again yourself, just to be sure. Many
problems reported by our users in the past have resulted from
the use of improperly formatted media, which is why we are
making a point of it now.If you are creating the floppies on another FreeBSD machine,
a format is still not a bad idea, though you do not need to put
a DOS filesystem on each floppy. You can use the
disklabel and newfs
commands to put a UFS filesystem on them instead, as the
following sequence of commands (for a 3.5" 1.44MB floppy)
illustrates:&prompt.root; fdformat -f 1440 fd0.1440
&prompt.root; disklabel -w -r fd0.1440 floppy3
&prompt.root; newfs -t 2 -u 18 -l 1 -i 65536 /dev/fd0Use fd0.1200 and
floppy5 for 5.25" 1.2MB disks.Then you can mount and write to them like any other
filesystem.After you have formatted the floppies, you will need to copy
the files to them. The distribution files are split into chunks
conveniently sized so that 5 of them will fit on a conventional
1.44MB floppy. Go through all your floppies, packing as many
files as will fit on each one, until you have all of the
distributions you want packed up in this fashion. Each
distribution should go into a subdirectory on the floppy, e.g.:
a:\bin\bin.aa,
a:\bin\bin.ab, and so on.Once you come to the Media screen during the install
process, select Floppy and you will be prompted
for the rest.Installing from an MS-DOS Partitioninstallationfrom MS-DOSTo prepare for an installation from an MS-DOS partition,
copy the files from the distribution into a directory on that
partition. For example, c:\freebsd. The
directory structure of the CDROM or FTP site must be partially
reproduced within this directory, so we suggest using the DOS
xcopy command if you are copying it from a CD.
For example, to prepare for a minimal installation of
FreeBSD:C:\>md c:\freebsdC:\>xcopy e:\bin c:\freebsd\bin\ /sC:\>xcopy e:\manpages c:\freebsd\manpages\ /sAssuming that C: is where you have
free space and E: is where your CDROM
is mounted.If you do not have a CDROM drive, you can download the
distribution from ftp.FreeBSD.org.
Each distribution is in its own directory; for example, the
bin distribution can be found in the &rel.current;/bin/
directory.For as many distributions you wish to install from an MS-DOS
partition (and you have the free space for), install each one
under c:\freebsd — the
BIN distribution is the only one required for
a minimum installation.Creating an Installation Tapeinstallationfrom QIC/SCSI TapeInstalling from tape is probably the easiest method, short
of an online FTP install or CDROM install. The installation
program expects the files to be simply tarred onto the tape.
After getting all of the distribution files you are interested
in, simply tar them onto the tape:&prompt.root; cd /freebsd/distdir
&prompt.root; tar cvf /dev/rwt0 dist1 ... dist2When you go to do the installation, you should also make
sure that you leave enough room in some temporary directory
(which you will be allowed to choose) to accommodate the
full contents of the tape you have created.
Due to the non-random access nature of tapes, this method of
installation requires quite a bit of temporary storage. You
should expect to require as much temporary storage as you have
stuff written on tape.When starting the installation, the tape must be in the
drive before booting from the boot
floppy. The installation probe may otherwise fail to find
it.Before Installing over a Networkinstallationnetworkserial (SLIP or PPP)installationnetworkparallel (PLIP)installationnetworkEthernetThere are three types of network installations you can do.
Serial port (SLIP or PPP), Parallel port (PLIP (laplink cable)),
or Ethernet (a standard Ethernet controller (includes some
PCMCIA)).The SLIP support is rather primitive, and limited primarily
to hard-wired links, such as a serial cable running between a
laptop computer and another computer. The link should be
hard-wired as the SLIP installation does not currently offer a
dialing capability; that facility is provided with the PPP
utility, which should be used in preference to SLIP whenever
possible.If you are using a modem, then PPP is almost certainly
your only choice. Make sure that you have your service
provider's information handy as you will need to know it fairly
early in the installation process.If you use PAP or CHAP to connect your ISP (in other words, if
you can connect to the ISP in Windows without using a script), then
all you will need to do is type in dial at the
ppp prompt. Otherwise, you will need to
know how to dial your ISP using the AT commands
specific to your modem, as the PPP dialer provides only a very
simple terminal emulator. Please refer to the user-ppp handbook and FAQ entries for further information.
If you have problems, logging can be directed to the screen using
the command set log local ....If a hard-wired connection to another FreeBSD (2.0-R or
later) machine is available, you might also consider installing
over a laplink parallel port cable. The data rate
over the parallel port is much higher than what is typically
possible over a serial line (up to 50kbytes/sec), thus resulting
in a quicker installation.Finally, for the fastest possible network installation, an
Ethernet adapter is always a good choice! FreeBSD supports most
common PC Ethernet cards; a table of supported cards (and their
required settings) is provided in the Hardware Notes for each
release of FreeBSD. If you are using one of the supported PCMCIA
Ethernet cards, also be sure that it is plugged in
before the laptop is powered on! FreeBSD does
not, unfortunately, currently support hot insertion of PCMCIA cards
during installation.You will also need to know your IP address on the network,
the netmask value for your address class, and the name of your
machine. If you are installing over a PPP connection and do not
have a static IP, fear not, the IP address can be dynamically
assigned by your ISP. Your system administrator can tell you
which values to use for your particular network setup. If you
will be referring to other hosts by name rather than IP address,
you will also need a name server and possibly the address of a
gateway (if you are using PPP, it is your provider's IP address)
to use in talking to it. If you want to install by FTP via a
HTTP proxy (see below), you will also need the proxy's address.
If you do not know the answers to all or most of these questions,
then you should really probably talk to your system administrator
or ISP before trying this type of
installation.Before Installing via NFSinstallationnetworkNFSThe NFS installation is fairly straight-forward. Simply
copy the FreeBSD distribution files you want onto a server
somewhere and then point the NFS media selection at it.If this server supports only privileged port
(as is generally the default for Sun workstations), you will
need to set this option in the Options menu before
installation can proceed.If you have a poor quality Ethernet card which suffers
from very slow transfer rates, you may also wish to toggle the
appropriate Options flag.In order for NFS installation to work, the server must
support subdir mounts, e.g., if your FreeBSD 3.4 distribution
directory lives on:
ziggy:/usr/archive/stuff/FreeBSD, then
ziggy will have to allow the direct mounting
of /usr/archive/stuff/FreeBSD, not just
/usr or
/usr/archive/stuff.In FreeBSD's /etc/exports file, this
is controlled by the . Other NFS
servers may have different conventions. If you are getting
permission denied messages from the server, then
it is likely that you do not have this enabled
properly.
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/introduction/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/introduction/chapter.sgml
index ab154752b1..c6aedc0bf6 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/introduction/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/introduction/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,905 +1,905 @@
JimMockRestructured, reorganized, and parts
rewritten by IntroductionSynopsisThank you for your interest in FreeBSD! The following chapter
covers various items about the FreeBSD Project, such as its history,
goals, development model, and so on.After reading this chapter, you will know:How FreeBSD relates to other computer operating systems.The history of the FreeBSD Project.The goals of the FreeBSD Project.The basics of the FreeBSD open-source development model.And of course: where the name "FreeBSD" comes from.Welcome to FreeBSD!4.4BSD-LiteFreeBSD is a 4.4BSD-Lite based operating system for the Intel
architecture (x86) and DEC Alpha based systems. Ports to other
architectures are also underway. For a brief overview of FreeBSD,
see the next section. You can also
read about the history of FreeBSD,
or the current release. If you
are interested in contributing something to the Project (code,
hardware, unmarked bills), see the Contributing to FreeBSD article.What Can FreeBSD Do?FreeBSD has many noteworthy features. Some of these
are:preemptive multitaskingPreemptive multitasking with
dynamic priority adjustment to ensure smooth and fair
sharing of the computer between applications and users, even
under the heaviest of loads.multi-user facilitiesMulti-user facilities which allow many
people to use a FreeBSD system simultaneously for a variety
of things. This means, for example, that system peripherals
such as printers and tape drives are properly shared between
all users on the system or the network and that individual
resource limits can be placed on users or groups of users,
protecting critical system resources from over-use.TCP/IP networkingStrong TCP/IP networking with
support for industry standards such as SLIP, PPP, NFS, DHCP,
and NIS. This means that your FreeBSD machine can
interoperate easily with other systems as well as act as an
enterprise server, providing vital functions such as NFS
(remote file access) and email services or putting your
organization on the Internet with WWW, FTP, routing and
firewall (security) services.memory protectionMemory protection ensures that
applications (or users) cannot interfere with each other. One
application crashing will not affect others in any way.FreeBSD is a 32-bit operating
system (64-bit on the Alpha) and was
designed as such from the ground up.X Window SystemXFree86The industry standard X Window System
(X11R6) provides a graphical user interface (GUI) for the cost
of a common VGA card and monitor and comes with full
sources.binary compatibilityLinuxbinary compatibilitySCObinary compatibilitySVR4binary compatibilityBSD/OSbinary compatibilityNetBSDBinary compatibility with many
programs built for Linux, SCO, SVR4, BSDI and NetBSD.Thousands of ready-to-run
applications are available from the FreeBSD
ports and packages
collection. Why search the net when you can find it all right
here?Thousands of additional and
easy-to-port applications are available
on the Internet. FreeBSD is source code compatible with most
popular commercial Unix systems and thus most applications
require few, if any, changes to compile.virtual memoryDemand paged virtual memory and
merged VM/buffer cache design efficiently
satisfies applications with large appetites for memory while
still maintaining interactive response to other users.Symetric Multi-Processing (SMP)SMP support for machines with
multiple CPUs.compilersCcompilersC++compilersFortranA full complement of C,
C++, Fortran, and
Perl development tools.
Many additional languages for advanced research
and development are also available in the ports and packages
collection.source codeSource code for the entire system
means you have the greatest degree of control over your
environment. Why be locked into a proprietary solution
at the mercy of your vendor when you can have a truly open
system?Extensive online
documentation.And many more!4.4BSD-LiteComputer Systems Research Group (CSRG)U.C. BerkeleyFreeBSD is based on the 4.4BSD-Lite release from Computer
Systems Research Group (CSRG) at the University of California at
Berkeley, and carries on the distinguished tradition of BSD
systems development. In addition to the fine work provided by
CSRG, the FreeBSD Project has put in many thousands of hours in
fine tuning the system for maximum performance and reliability in
real-life load situations. As many of the commercial giants
struggle to field PC operating systems with such features,
performance and reliability, FreeBSD can offer them
now!The applications to which FreeBSD can be put are truly
limited only by your own imagination. From software development
to factory automation, inventory control to azimuth correction of
remote satellite antennae; if it can be done with a commercial
Unix product then it is more than likely that you can do it with
FreeBSD too! FreeBSD also benefits significantly from the
literally thousands of high quality applications developed by
research centers and universities around the world, often
available at little to no cost. Commercial applications are also
available and appearing in greater numbers every day.Because the source code for FreeBSD itself is generally
available, the system can also be customized to an almost unheard
of degree for special applications or projects, and in ways not
generally possible with operating systems from most major
commercial vendors. Here is just a sampling of some of the
applications in which people are currently using FreeBSD:Internet Services: The robust TCP/IP
networking built into FreeBSD makes it an ideal platform for a
variety of Internet services such as:FTP serversFTP serversweb serversWorld Wide Web servers (standard or secure
[SSL])firewallIP masqueradingFirewalls and NAT (IP masquerading)
gatewayselectronic mailElectronic Mail serversUSENETUSENET News or Bulletin Board SystemsAnd more...With FreeBSD, you can easily start out small with an
inexpensive 386 class PC and upgrade all the way up to a
quad-processor Xeon with RAID storage as your enterprise
grows.Education: Are you a student of
computer science or a related engineering field? There is no
better way of learning about operating systems, computer
architecture and networking than the hands on, under the hood
experience that FreeBSD can provide. A number of freely
available CAD, mathematical and graphic design packages also
make it highly useful to those whose primary interest in a
computer is to get other work
done!Research: With source code for the
entire system available, FreeBSD is an excellent platform for
research in operating systems as well as other branches of
computer science. FreeBSD's freely available nature also makes
it possible for remote groups to collaborate on ideas or
shared development without having to worry about special
licensing agreements or limitations on what may be discussed
in open forums.routerDNS ServerNetworking: Need a new router? A
name server (DNS)? A firewall to keep people out of your
internal network? FreeBSD can easily turn that unused 386 or
486 PC sitting in the corner into an advanced router with
sophisticated packet-filtering capabilities.X Window SystemXFree86X Window SystemAccellerated-XX Window workstation: FreeBSD is a
fine choice for an inexpensive X terminal solution, either
using the freely available XFree86 server or one of the
excellent commercial servers provided by X Inside. Unlike an
X terminal, FreeBSD allows many applications to be run
locally, if desired, thus relieving the burden on a central
server. FreeBSD can even boot diskless, making
individual workstations even cheaper and easier to
administer.GNU Compiler CollectionSoftware Development: The basic
FreeBSD system comes with a full complement of development
tools including the renowned GNU C/C++ compiler and
debugger.FreeBSD is available in both source and binary form on CDROM
and via anonymous FTP. Please see
for more information about obtaining FreeBSD.Who uses FreeBSD?UsersLarge sites running FreeBSDFreeBSD is used to power some of the biggest sites on the
Internet, including:Yahoo!Yahoo!ApacheApacheBe, Inc.Be, Inc.Blue Mountain ArtsBlue Mountain
ArtsPair NetworksPair
NetworksWhistle CommunicationsWhistle
CommunicationsMicrosoftMicrosoftHotmailHotmailSony JapanSony
Japanand many more.About the FreeBSD ProjectThe following section provides some background information on
the project, including a brief history, project goals, and the
development model of the project.JordanHubbardContributed by A Brief History of FreeBSD386BSD PatchkitHubbard, JordanWilliams, NateGrimes, RodFreeBSD ProjectHistoryThe FreeBSD project had its genesis in the early part of 1993,
partially as an outgrowth of the Unofficial 386BSD
Patchkit by the patchkit's last 3 coordinators: Nate
Williams, Rod Grimes and myself.386BSDOur original goal was to produce an intermediate snapshot of
386BSD in order to fix a number of problems with it that the
patchkit mechanism just was not capable of solving. Some of you
may remember the early working title for the project being
386BSD 0.5 or 386BSD Interim in
reference to that fact.Jolitz, Bill386BSD was Bill Jolitz's operating system, which had been up
to that point suffering rather severely from almost a year's worth
of neglect. As the patchkit swelled ever more uncomfortably with
each passing day, we were in unanimous agreement that something
had to be done and decided to assist Bill by providing
this interim cleanup snapshot. Those plans came to
a rude halt when Bill Jolitz suddenly decided to withdraw his
sanction from the project without any clear indication of what
would be done instead.Greenman, DavidWalnut Creek CDROMIt did not take us long to decide that the goal remained
worthwhile, even without Bill's support, and so we adopted the
name FreeBSD, coined by David Greenman. Our initial
objectives were set after consulting with the system's current
users and, once it became clear that the project was on the road
to perhaps even becoming a reality, I contacted Walnut Creek CDROM
with an eye towards improving FreeBSD's distribution channels for
those many unfortunates without easy access to the Internet.
Walnut Creek CDROM not only supported the idea of distributing
FreeBSD on CD but also went so far as to provide the project with a
machine to work on and a fast Internet connection. Without Walnut
Creek CDROM's almost unprecedented degree of faith in what was, at
the time, a completely unknown project, it is quite unlikely that
FreeBSD would have gotten as far, as fast, as it has today.4.3BSD-LiteNet/2U.C. Berkeley386BSDFree Software FoundationThe first CDROM (and general net-wide) distribution was
FreeBSD 1.0, released in December of 1993. This was based on the
4.3BSD-Lite (Net/2) tape from U.C. Berkeley, with
many components also provided by 386BSD and the Free Software
Foundation. It was a fairly reasonable success for a first
offering, and we followed it with the highly successful FreeBSD
1.1 release in May of 1994.NovellU.C. BerkeleyNet/2AT&TAround this time, some rather unexpected storm clouds formed
on the horizon as Novell and U.C. Berkeley settled their
long-running lawsuit over the legal status of the Berkeley Net/2
tape. A condition of that settlement was U.C. Berkeley's
concession that large parts of Net/2 were encumbered
code and the property of Novell, who had in turn acquired it from
AT&T some time previously. What Berkeley got in return was
Novell's blessing that the 4.4BSD-Lite release, when
it was finally released, would be declared unencumbered and all
existing Net/2 users would be strongly encouraged to switch. This
included FreeBSD, and the project was given until the end of July
1994 to stop shipping its own Net/2 based product. Under the
terms of that agreement, the project was allowed one last release
before the deadline, that release being FreeBSD 1.1.5.1.FreeBSD then set about the arduous task of literally
re-inventing itself from a completely new and rather incomplete
set of 4.4BSD-Lite bits. The Lite releases were
light in part because Berkeley's CSRG had removed large chunks of
code required for actually constructing a bootable running system
(due to various legal requirements) and the fact that the Intel
port of 4.4 was highly incomplete. It took the project until
November of 1994 to make this transition, at which point it
released FreeBSD 2.0 to the net and on CDROM (in late December).
Despite being still more than a little rough around the edges,
the release was a significant success and was followed by the
more robust and easier to install FreeBSD 2.0.5 release in June of
1995.We released FreeBSD 2.1.5 in August of 1996, and it appeared
to be popular enough among the ISP and commercial communities that
another release along the 2.1-STABLE branch was merited. This was
FreeBSD 2.1.7.1, released in February 1997 and capping the end of
mainstream development on 2.1-STABLE. Now in maintenance mode,
only security enhancements and other critical bug fixes will be
done on this branch (RELENG_2_1_0).FreeBSD 2.2 was branched from the development mainline
(-CURRENT) in November 1996 as the RELENG_2_2
branch, and the first full release (2.2.1) was released in April
1997. Further releases along the 2.2 branch were done in the
summer and fall of '97, the last of which (2.2.8) appeared in
November 1998. The first official 3.0 release appeared in
October 1998 and spelled the beginning of the end for the 2.2
branch.The tree branched again on Jan 20, 1999, leading to the
4.0-CURRENT and 3.X-STABLE branches. From 3.X-STABLE, 3.1 was
released on February 15, 1999, 3.2 on May 15, 1999, 3.3 on
September 16, 1999, 3.4 on December 20, 1999, and 3.5 on
June 24, 2000, which was followed a few days later by a minor
point release update to 3.5.1, to incorporate some last-minute
security fixes to Kerberos. This will be the final release in the
3.X branch.There was another branch on March 13, 2000, which saw the
emergence of the 4.X-STABLE branch, now considered to be the
"current -stable branch". There have been several releases
from it so far: 4.0-RELEASE came out in March 2000, 4.1 was
released in July 2000, 4.2 in November 2000, 4.3 in April
2001, and 4.4 in September 2001. There will be more releases
along the 4.X-stable (RELENG_4) branch well into 2002.Long-term development projects continue to take place in the
5.0-CURRENT (trunk) branch, and SNAPshot releases of 5.0 on
CDROM (and, of course, on the net) are continually made available
from
the snapshot server as work progresses.JordanHubbardContributed by FreeBSD Project GoalsFreeBSD ProjectGoalsThe goals of the FreeBSD Project are to provide software that
may be used for any purpose and without strings attached. Many of
us have a significant investment in the code (and project) and
would certainly not mind a little financial compensation now and
then, but we are definitely not prepared to insist on it. We
believe that our first and foremost mission is to
provide code to any and all comers, and for whatever purpose, so
that the code gets the widest possible use and provides the widest
possible benefit. This is, I believe, one of the most fundamental
goals of Free Software and one that we enthusiastically
support.GNU General Public License (GPL)GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL)BSD CopyrightThat code in our source tree which falls under the GNU
General Public License (GPL) or Library General Public License
(LGPL) comes with slightly more strings attached, though at
least on the side of enforced access rather than the usual
opposite. Due to the additional complexities that can evolve
in the commercial use of GPL software we do, however, prefer
software submitted under the more relaxed BSD copyright when
it is a reasonable option to do so.SatoshiAsamiContributed by The FreeBSD Development ModelFreeBSD ProjectDevelopment ModelThe development of FreeBSD is a very open and flexible
process, FreeBSD being literally built from the contributions
of hundreds of people around the world, as can be seen from
- our our list of
contributors. We are constantly on the lookout for
new developers and ideas, and those interested in becoming
more closely involved with the project need simply contact us
at the &a.hackers;. The &a.announce; is also available to
those wishing to make other FreeBSD users aware of major areas
of work.Useful things to know about the FreeBSD project and its
development process, whether working independently or in close
cooperation:The CVS repositoryCVSrepositoryConcurrent Versions SystemCVSThe central source tree for FreeBSD is maintained by
CVS
(Concurrent Versions System), a freely available source code
control tool that comes bundled with FreeBSD. The primary
CVS
repository resides on a machine in Santa Clara CA, USA
from where it is replicated to numerous mirror machines
throughout the world. The CVS tree, as well as the -CURRENT and -STABLE trees which are checked out
of it, can be easily replicated to your own machine as well.
Please refer to the Synchronizing
your source tree section for more information on
doing this.The committers listcommittersThe committers
are the people who have write access to
the CVS tree, and are thus authorized to make modifications
to the FreeBSD source (the term committer
comes from the &man.cvs.1; commit
command, which is used to bring new changes into the CVS
repository). The best way of making submissions for review
by the committers list is to use the &man.send-pr.1;
command, though if something appears to be jammed in the
system then you may also reach them by sending mail to
the &a.committers;.The FreeBSD core teamcore teamThe FreeBSD core team
would be equivalent to the board of directors if the FreeBSD
Project were a company. The primary task of the core team
is to make sure the project, as a whole, is in good shape
and is heading in the right directions. Inviting dedicated
and responsible developers to join our group of committers
is one of the functions of the core team, as is the
recruitment of new core team members as others move on.
The current core team was elected from a pool of committer
candidates in October 2000. Elections are held every 2 years.
Some core team members also have specific areas of
responsibility, meaning that they are committed to
ensuring that some large portion of the system works as
advertised. For a complete list of FreeBSD developers
and their areas of responsibility, please see the Contributors
ListMost members of the core team are volunteers when it
comes to FreeBSD development and do not benefit from the
project financially, so commitment should
also not be misconstrued as meaning guaranteed
support. The board of directors
analogy above is not actually very accurate, and it may be
more suitable to say that these are the people who gave up
their lives in favor of FreeBSD against their better
judgment!Outside contributorscontributorsLast, but definitely not least, the largest group of
developers are the users themselves who provide feedback and
bug fixes to us on an almost constant basis. The primary
way of keeping in touch with FreeBSD's more non-centralized
development is to subscribe to the &a.hackers; (see mailing list info) where
such things are discussed.The
FreeBSD Contributors List is a long
and growing one, so why not join it by contributing
something back to FreeBSD today?Providing code is not the only way of contributing to
the project; for a more complete list of things that need
doing, please refer to the FreeBSD Project web
site.In summary, our development model is organized as a loose set
of concentric circles. The centralized model is designed for the
convenience of the users of FreeBSD, who are
thereby provided with an easy way of tracking one central code
base, not to keep potential contributors out! Our desire is to
present a stable operating system with a large set of coherent
application programs that the users
can easily install and use, and this model works very well in
accomplishing that.All we ask of those who would join us as FreeBSD developers is
some of the same dedication its current people have to its
continued success!The Current FreeBSD ReleaseNetBSDOpenBSD386BSDFree Software FoundationU.C. BerkeleyComputer Systems Research Group (CSRG)FreeBSD is a freely available, full source 4.4BSD-Lite based
release for Intel i386, i486, Pentium, Pentium Pro, Celeron,
Pentium II, Pentium III (or compatible) and DEC Alpha based computer
systems. It is based primarily on software from U.C. Berkeley's
CSRG group, with some enhancements from NetBSD, OpenBSD, 386BSD, and
the Free Software Foundation.Since our release of FreeBSD 2.0 in late 94, the performance,
feature set, and stability of FreeBSD has improved dramatically.
The largest change is a revamped virtual memory system with a merged
VM/file buffer cache that not only increases performance, but also
reduces FreeBSD's memory footprint, making a 5MB configuration a
more acceptable minimum. Other enhancements include full NIS client
and server support, transaction TCP support, dial-on-demand PPP,
integrated DHCP support, an improved SCSI subsystem, ISDN support,
support for ATM, FDDI, Fast and Gigabit Ethernet (1000Mbit)
adapters, improved support for the latest Adaptec controllers, and
many hundreds of bug fixes.We have also taken the comments and suggestions of many of our
users to heart and have attempted to provide what we hope is a more
sane and easily understood installation process. Your feedback on
this (constantly evolving) process is especially welcome!In addition to the base distributions, FreeBSD offers a
ported software collection with thousands of commonly
sought-after programs. At the time of this printing, there
were over &os.numports; ports! The list of ports ranges from
http (WWW) servers, to games, languages, editors, and almost
everything in between. The entire ports collection requires
approximately 100MB of storage, all ports being expressed as
deltas to their original sources. This makes
it much easier for us to update ports, and greatly reduces the
disk space demands made by the older 1.0 ports collection. To
compile a port, you simply change to the directory of the
program you wish to install, type make
install, and let the system do the rest. The full
original distribution for each port you build is retrieved
dynamically off the CDROM or a local FTP site, so you need
only enough disk space to build the ports you want. Almost
every port is also provided as a pre-compiled
package, which can be installed with a simple
command (pkg_add) by those who do not wish
to compile their own ports from source.A number of additional documents which you may find very helpful
in the process of installing and using FreeBSD may now also be found
in the /usr/share/doc directory on any machine
running FreeBSD 2.1 or later. You may view the locally installed
manuals with any HTML capable browser using the following
URLs:The FreeBSD Handbook/usr/share/doc/handbook/index.htmlThe FreeBSD FAQ/usr/share/doc/faq/index.htmlYou can also view the master (and most frequently updated)
copies at http://www.FreeBSD.org/.
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ppp-and-slip/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ppp-and-slip/chapter.sgml
index 6734b5e1b4..b742f4ff70 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ppp-and-slip/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/ppp-and-slip/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,3147 +1,3147 @@
JimMockRestructured, reorganized, and updated by PPP and SLIPSynopsisPPPSLIPFreeBSD has a number of ways to link one computer to
another. To establish a network or Internet connection through a
dial-up modem, or to allow others to do so through you, requires
the use of PPP or SLIP. This chapter describes setting up
these modem-based communication services in detail.After reading this chapter, you will know:How to setup User PPP.How to setup Kernel PPP.How to setup PPPoE (PPP over
Ethernet).How to setup PPPoA (PPP over
ATM).How to configure and setup a SLIP client and
server.PPPuser PPPPPPkernel PPPPPPover EthernetBefore reading this chapter, you should:Be familiar with basic network terminology.Understand the basics and purpose of a dialup connection
and PPP and/or SLIP.You may be wondering what the main difference is between User
PPP and kernel PPP. The answer is simple; user PPP processes the
inbound and outbound data in userland rather than in the kernel.
This is expensive in terms of copying the data between the kernel
and userland, but allows a far more feature-rich ppp implementation.
User PPP uses the tun device to communicate
with the outside world whereas kernel-ppp uses the
ppp device.Throughout in this chapter, user ppp will simply be
referred to as ppp unless a distinction needs to be made between it
and any other PPP software such as pppd.
Unless otherwise stated, all of the commands explained in this
section should be executed as root.TomRhodesUpdated and enhanced by BrianSomersOriginally contributed by NikClaytonWith input from DirkFrömbergPeterChildsUsing User PPPUser PPPAssumptionsThis document assumes you have the following:ISPPPPAn account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) which
you connect to using PPP.Further, you have a modem or
other device connected to your system and configured
correctly, which allows you to connect to your ISP.The dial-up number(s) of your ISP.PAPCHAPUnixlogin namepasswordYour login name and password. (Either a
regular Unix-style login and password pair, or a PAP or CHAP
login and password pair.)nameserverThe IP address of one or more name servers.
Normally, you will be given two IP addresses by your ISP to
use for this. If they have not given you at least one, then
you can use the enable dns command in
your ppp.conf file to have
ppp set the name servers for
you. This feature depends on your ISPs PPP implementation
supporting DNS negotiation.The following information may be supplied by your ISP, but
is not completely necessary:The IP address of your ISP's gateway. The gateway is
the machine to which you will connect and will be set up as
your default route. If you do not have
this information, we can make one up and your ISP's PPP
server will tell us the correct value when we connect.This IP number is referred to as
HISADDR by
ppp.The netmask you should use. If your ISP has not
provided you with one, you can safely use 255.255.255.255.static IP addressIf your ISP provides you with a static IP address and
hostname, you can enter it. Otherwise, we simply let the
peer assign whatever IP address it sees fit.If you do not have any of the required information, contact
your ISP.Throughout this section, many of the examples showing
the contents of configuration files are numbered by line.
These numbers serve to aid in the presentation and
discussion only and are not meant to be placed in the actual
file. Proper indentation with tab and space characters is
also important.Preparing the KernelAs previously mentioned, ppp
uses the tun device. If this device
has not been compiled into your kernel,
ppp will load it on demand as a
module. The tunnel driver is dynamic, so any number of
devices may be created (you are not limited by any kernel
configuration values).It should be noted that the tunnel driver creates devices
on demand, so ifconfig -a will not necessarily
show any tun devices.Check the tun DeviceUnder normal circumstances, most users will only use one
tun device
(/dev/tun0). References to
tun0 below may be changed to
tunN where N
is any unit number corresponding to your system.For FreeBSD installations that do not have DEVFS enabled,
the existence of the tun0 device should
be verified (this is not necessary if DEVFS is enabled as device
nodes will be created on demand).The easiest way to make sure that the
tun0 device is configured correctly
is to remake the device. To remake the device, do the
following:&prompt.root; cd /dev
&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV tun0If you need 16 tunnel devices in your kernel, you will need
to create them. This can be done by executing the following
commands:&prompt.root; cd /dev
&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV tun15Check the ModemIf you reconfigured your kernel
then you should recall the sio
device. If your modem acts like a standard serial port
then you most likely only need to make the serial device.
You can do this by changing your directory to
/dev and running the MAKEDEV
script like above. Now make the serial device with
&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV cuaa
which will create the serial devices for your system.
If your modem is on sio1 or
COM2 if you are in dos, then your
modem device would be /dev/cuaa1.
Manual ConnectionsConnecting to the internet by manually controlling
ppp is quick, easy, and a great way
to debug a connection or just get information on how your
ISP handles connections. Lets start
PPP from the command line,
note that, in all of our examples we will use localhost
as the hostname of the machine running PPP.
You start ppp by just typing ppp:
&prompt.root; pppWe have now started pppppp ON example> set device /dev/cuaa1We set our modem device, in this case it is
cuaa1ppp ON example> set speed 115200Set the connection speed, in this case we
are using 115,200 kbpsppp ON example> enable dnsTell ppp to configure our
resolver and add the nameserver lines to
/etc/resolv.conf. If we ppp
cannot determine our hostname, we can set one manually later
ppp ON example> termSwitch to "terminal" mode so that we can manually
control the modem
deflink: Entering terminal mode on /dev/cuaa1
type '~h' for helpat
OK
atdt123456789Use at to initialize the modem,
then use atdt and the number for your
ISP to begin the dial in processCONNECTConfirmation of the connection, if we are going to have
any connection problems, unrelated to hardware, here is where
we will attempt to resolve them.ISP Login:myusernameHere you are prompted for a username, return the
prompt with the username that was provided by the
ISPISP Pass:mypasswordThis time we are prompted for a password, just
reply with the password that was provided by the
ISP. Just like when logging into
FreeBSD, the password will not echo.Shell or PPP:pppDepending on your ISP this prompt
may never appear. Here we are being asked if we wish to
use a shell on the provider, or to start
ppp. In this example, we have chosen
to use ppp as we want an internet
connection.Ppp ON example>Notice that in this example the first
has been capitalized. This shows that we have successfully
connected to the ISP.PPp ON example>We have successfully authenticated with our
ISP and are waiting for the
assigned IP address.PPP ON example>We have made an agreement on an IP
address and successfully completed our connectionPPP ON example>add default HISADDRHere we add our default route, we need to do this
before we can talk to the outside world as currently the
only established connection is with the peer. If this
fails due to existing routes you can put a bang character
! in front of the .
Alternatively, you can set this before making the actual connection
and it will negotiate a new route accordingly.If everything went good we should now have an active
connection to the internet, which could be thrown into
the background using
CTRLz
If you notice the PPP return to
ppp then we have lost our connection.
This is good to know because it shows our connection status.
Capital P's show that we have a connection to the
ISP and lowercase p's show that the
connection has been lost for whatever reason.
ppp only has these 2 states.
Troubleshooting Manual ConnectionsLike everything else, once in awhile a problem or
may occur. PPP is no
exemption to this theory. If ppp
would happen to stop responding there are some things
we can try.If you have a direct line and cannot seem to make a
connection, then turn hardware flow CTS/RTS
to off with the . This is
mainly the case if you are connected to some
PPP capable terminal servers,
where PPP hangs when it tries
- to write data to your communication link, so it would
+ to write data to your communication link, so it
would be waiting for a CTS, or Clear
To Send signal which may never come. If you use this
option however, you should also use the
option, which may be required to defeat hardware dependent on
passing certain characters from end to end, most of the time
XON/XOFF. See the &man.ppp.8; man page for more information
on this option, and how it is used.If you have an older modem, you may need to use the
. Parity is set at none
be default, but is used for error checking (with a large
increase in traffic) on older modems and some
ISPs. You may need this option for
the Compuserve ISP.PPP may not return to the
command mode, which is usually a negotiation error where
the ISP is waiting for your side to start
negotiating. At this point, using the ~p
command will force ppp to start sending the configuration
information.If you never obtain a login prompt, then most likely you
- you need to use PAP or CHAP
+ need to use PAP or CHAP
authentication instead of the Unix-style in the example above. To
use PAP or CHAP just add the
following options to PPP before going
into terminal mode:ppp ON localhost> set authname myusernameWhere myusername should be replaced with
the username that was assigned by the ISP.ppp ON localhost> set authkey mypasswordWhere mypassword should be replaced with
the password that was assigned by the ISP.If you connect fine, but cannot seem to find any domain name, try to
use &man.ping.8; with an IP address and see if you
can get any return information. If you experience 100 percent (100%)
packet loss, then its most likely that you were not assigned a default
route. Double check that the option
was set during the connection. If you can connect to a remote
IP address then it is possible that a resolver address
has not been added to the /etc/resolv.conf. This
file should look like:domain example.com
nameserver x.x.x.x
nameserver y.y.y.yWhere x.x.x.x and
y.y.y.y should be replaced with the
IP address of your ISP's DNS servers.
This information may or may not have been provided when you signed up, but
a quick call to your ISP should remedy that.You could also have &man.syslog.3; provide a logging function
for your PPP connection. Just add:
!ppp
*.* /var/log/ppp.logto /etc/syslog.conf. In most cases, this
functionality already exists.Automatic PPP ConfigurationPPPconfigurationBoth ppp and pppd
(the kernel level implementation of PPP) use the configuration
files located in the /etc/ppp directory.
Examples for user ppp can be found in
/usr/share/examples/ppp/.Configuring ppp requires that you edit a
number of files, depending on your requirements. What you put
in them depends to some extent on whether your ISP allocates IP
addresses statically (i.e., you get given one IP address, and
always use that one) or dynamically (i.e., your IP address
changes each time you connect to your ISP).PPP and Static IP AddressesPPPwith static IP addressesYou will need to edit the
/etc/ppp/ppp.conf configuration file. It
should look similar to the example below.Lines that end in a : start in
the first column (beginning of the line)— all other
lines should be indented as shown using spaces or
tabs. Most of the information you need to provide here
was shown to us by doing the manual dial above.1 default:
2 set log Phase Chat LCP IPCP CCP tun command
3 ident user-ppp VERSION (built COMPILATIONDATE)
4 set device /dev/cuaa0
5 set speed 115200
6 set dial "ABORT BUSY ABORT NO\\sCARRIER TIMEOUT 5 \
7 \"\" AT OK-AT-OK ATE1Q0 OK \\dATDT\\T TIMEOUT 40 CONNECT"
8 set timeout 180
9 enable dns
10
11 provider:
12 set phone "(123) 456 7890"
13 set authname foo
14 set authkey bar
15 set login "TIMEOUT 10 \"\" \"\" gin:--gin: \\U word: \\P col: ppp"
16 set timeout 300
17 set ifaddr x.x.x.xy.y.y.y 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
18 add default HISADDRLine 1:Identifies the default entry. Commands in this
entry are executed automatically when ppp is run.Line 2:Enables logging parameters. When the configuration
is working satisfactorily, this line should be reduced
to saying
set log phase tun
in order to avoid excessive log file sizes.Line 3:Tells PPP how to identify itself to the peer.
PPP identifies itself to the peer if it has any trouble
negotiating and setting up the link, providing information
that the peers administrator may find useful when
investigating such problems.Line 4:Identifies the device to which the modem is
connected. COM1 is
/dev/cuaa0 and
COM2 is
/dev/cuaa1.Line 5:Sets the speed you want to connect at. If 115200
does not work (it should with any reasonably new modem),
try 38400 instead.Line 6 & 7:PPPuser PPPThe dial string. User PPP uses an expect-send
syntax similar to the &man.chat.8; program. Refer to
the manual page for information on the features of this
language.Note that this command continues onto the next line
for readability. Any command in
ppp.conf may do this if the last
character on the line is a ``\'' character.Line 8:Sets the idle timeout for the link. 180 seconds
is the default, so this line is purely cosmetic.Line 9:Tells PPP to ask the peer to confirm the local
resolver settings. If you run a local name server, this
line should be commented out or removed.Line 10:A blank line for readability. Blank lines are ignored
by PPP.Line 11:Identifies an entry for a provider called
provider. This could be changed
to the name of your ISP so
that later you can use the
to start the connection.Line 12:Sets the phone number for this provider. Multiple
phone numbers may be specified using the colon
(:) or pipe character
(|)as a separator. The difference
between the two separators is described in &man.ppp.8;.
To summarize, if you want to rotate through the numbers,
use a colon. If you want to always attempt to dial the
first number first and only use the other numbers if the
first number fails, use the pipe character. Always
quote the entire set of phone numbers as shown.You must enclose the phone number in quotation marks
(") if there is any intention on using
spaces in the phone number. This can cause a simple, yet
subtle errorLine 13 & 14:Identifies the user name and password. When connecting
using a Unix-style login prompt, these values are referred
to by the set login command using the \U
and \P variables. When connecting using PAP or CHAP, these
values are used at authentication time.Line 15:PAPCHAPIf you are using PAP or CHAP, there will be no login
at this point, and this line should be commented out or
removed. See PAP and CHAP
authentication for further details.The login string is of the same chat-like syntax as
the dial string. In this example, the string works for
a service whose login session looks like this:J. Random Provider
login: foo
password: bar
protocol: pppYou will need to alter this script to suit your own
needs. When you write this script for the first time,
you should ensure that you have enabled chat
logging so you can determine if the conversation is going
as expected.Line 16:timeoutSets the default idle timeout (in seconds) for the
connection. Here, the connection will be closed
automatically after 300 seconds of inactivity. If you
never want to timeout, set this value to zero or use
the command line switch.Line 17:ISPSets the interface addresses. The string
x.x.x.x should be replaced by
the IP address that your provider has allocated to you.
The string y.y.y.y should be
replaced by the IP address that your ISP indicated for
their gateway (the machine to which you connect). If
your ISP has not given you a gateway address, use 10.0.0.2/0. If you need to use
a guessed address, make sure that you
create an entry in
/etc/ppp/ppp.linkup as per the
instructions for PPP
and Dynamic IP addresses. If this line is
omitted, ppp cannot run in
mode.Line 18:Adds a default route to your ISP's gateway. The
special word HISADDR is replaced with
the gateway address specified on line 9. It is
important that this line appears after line 9,
otherwise HISADDR will not yet be
initialized.If you do not wish to run ppp in ,
this line should be moved to the
ppp.linkup file.It is not necessary to add an entry to
ppp.linkup when you have a static IP
address and are running ppp in mode as your
routing table entries are already correct before you connect.
You may however wish to create an entry to invoke programs after
connection. This is explained later with the sendmail
example.Example configuration files can be found in the
/usr/share/examples/ppp/ directory.PPP and Dynamic IP AddressesPPPwith dynamic IP addressesIPCPIf your service provider does not assign static IP
addresses, ppp can be configured to
negotiate the local and remote addresses. This is done by
guessing an IP address and allowing
ppp to set it up correctly using the IP
Configuration Protocol (IPCP) after connecting. The
ppp.conf configuration is the same as
PPP and Static IP
Addresses, with the following change:17 set ifaddr 10.0.0.1/0 10.0.0.2/0 255.255.255.255Again, do not include the line number, it is just for
reference. Indentation of at least one space is
required.Line 17:The number after the / character
is the number of bits of the address that ppp will
insist on. You may wish to use IP numbers more
appropriate to your circumstances, but the above example
will always work.The last argument (0.0.0.0) tells
PPP to start negotiations using address 0.0.0.0 rather than 10.0.0.1 and is necessary for some
ISPs. Do not use 0.0.0.0 as the first
argument to set ifaddr as it prevents
PPP from setting up an initial route in
mode.If you are not running in mode, you
will need to create an entry in
/etc/ppp/ppp.linkup.
ppp.linkup is used after a connection has
been established. At this point, ppp will
have assigned the interface addresses and it will now be
possible to add the routing table entries:1 provider:
2 add default HISADDRLine 1:On establishing a connection, ppp
will look for an entry in ppp.linkup
according to the following rules: First, try to match
the same label as we used in
ppp.conf. If that fails, look for
an entry for the IP address of our gateway. This entry
is a four-octet IP style label. If we still have not
found an entry, look for the MYADDR
entry.Line 2:This line tells ppp to add a
default route that points to HISADDR.
HISADDR will be replaced with the IP
number of the gateway as negotiated by the IPCP.See the pmdemand entry in the files
/usr/share/examples/ppp/ppp.conf.sample and
/usr/share/examples/ppp/ppp.linkup.sample for a
detailed example.Receiving Incoming CallsPPPreceiving
incoming callsWhen you configure ppp to
receive incoming calls on a machine connected to a LAN, you
must decide if you wish to forward packets to the LAN. If you
do, you should allocate the peer an IP number from your LAN's
subnet, and use the command enable proxy in
your /etc/ppp/ppp.conf file. You should
also confirm that the /etc/rc.conf file
contains the following:gateway_enable="YES"Which getty?Configuring FreeBSD for Dial-up
Services provides a good description on enabling
dial-up services using &man.getty.8;.An alternative to getty is mgetty,
a smarter version of getty designed with
dial-up lines in mind.The advantages of using mgetty is
that it actively talks to modems,
meaning if port is turned off in
/etc/ttys then your modem will not answer
the phone.Later versions of mgetty (from
0.99beta onwards) also support the automatic detection of
PPP streams, allowing your clients script-less access to
your server.Refer to Mgetty and
AutoPPP for more information on
mgetty.PPP PermissionsThe ppp command must normally be run
as the root user. If however, you wish
to allow
ppp to run in server mode as a normal
user by executing ppp as described below,
that user must be given permission to run
ppp by adding them to the
network group in
/etc/group.You will also need to give them access to one or more
sections of the configuration file using the
allow command:allow users fred maryIf this command is used in the default
section, it gives the specified users access to
everything.PPP Shells for Dynamic-IP UsersPPP shellsCreate a file called
/etc/ppp/ppp-shell containing the
following:#!/bin/sh
IDENT=`echo $0 | sed -e 's/^.*-\(.*\)$/\1/'`
CALLEDAS="$IDENT"
TTY=`tty`
if [ x$IDENT = xdialup ]; then
IDENT=`basename $TTY`
fi
echo "PPP for $CALLEDAS on $TTY"
echo "Starting PPP for $IDENT"
exec /usr/sbin/ppp -direct $IDENTThis script should be executable. Now make a symbolic
link called ppp-dialup to this script
using the following commands:&prompt.root; ln -s ppp-shell /etc/ppp/ppp-dialupYou should use this script as the
shell for all of your dialup users.
This is an example from /etc/password
for a dialup PPP user with username
pchilds (remember do not directly edit
the password file, use vipw).pchilds:*:1011:300:Peter Childs PPP:/home/ppp:/etc/ppp/ppp-dialupCreate a /home/ppp directory that
is world readable containing the following 0 byte
files:-r--r--r-- 1 root wheel 0 May 27 02:23 .hushlogin
-r--r--r-- 1 root wheel 0 May 27 02:22 .rhostswhich prevents /etc/motd from being
displayed.PPP Shells for Static-IP UsersPPP shellsCreate the ppp-shell file as above,
and for each account with statically assigned IPs create a
symbolic link to ppp-shell.For example, if you have three dialup customers,
fred, sam, and
mary, that you route class C networks
for, you would type the following:&prompt.root; ln -s /etc/ppp/ppp-shell /etc/ppp/ppp-fred
&prompt.root; ln -s /etc/ppp/ppp-shell /etc/ppp/ppp-sam
&prompt.root; ln -s /etc/ppp/ppp-shell /etc/ppp/ppp-maryEach of these users dialup accounts should have their
shell set to the symbolic link created above (for example,
mary's shell should be
/etc/ppp/ppp-mary).Setting up ppp.conf for Dynamic-IP UsersThe /etc/ppp/ppp.conf file should
contain something along the lines of:default:
set debug phase lcp chat
set timeout 0
ttyd0:
set ifaddr 203.14.100.1 203.14.100.20 255.255.255.255
enable proxy
ttyd1:
set ifaddr 203.14.100.1 203.14.100.21 255.255.255.255
enable proxyThe indenting is important.The default: section is loaded for
each session. For each dialup line enabled in
/etc/ttys create an entry similar to
the one for ttyd0: above. Each line
should get a unique IP address from your pool of IP
addresses for dynamic users.Setting up ppp.conf for Static-IP
UsersAlong with the contents of the sample
/usr/share/examples/ppp/ppp.conf above you should add
a section for each of the statically assigned dialup users.
We will continue with our fred,
sam, and mary
example.fred:
set ifaddr 203.14.100.1 203.14.101.1 255.255.255.255
sam:
set ifaddr 203.14.100.1 203.14.102.1 255.255.255.255
mary:
set ifaddr 203.14.100.1 203.14.103.1 255.255.255.255The file /etc/ppp/ppp.linkup should
also contain routing information for each static IP user if
required. The line below would add a route for the 203.14.101.0 class C via the
client's ppp link.fred:
add 203.14.101.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 HISADDR
sam:
add 203.14.102.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 HISADDR
mary:
add 203.14.103.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 HISADDRMore on mgetty, AutoPPP, and MS
Extensionsmgetty and AutoPPPmgettyAutoPPPLCPConfiguring and compiling mgetty with
the AUTO_PPP option enabled allows
mgetty to detect the LCP phase of PPP
connections and automatically spawn off a ppp shell.
However, since the default login/password sequence does not
occur it is necessary to authenticate users using either PAP
or CHAP.This section assumes the user has successfully
configured, compiled, and installed a version of
mgetty with the
AUTO_PPP option (v0.99beta or
later).Make sure your
/usr/local/etc/mgetty+sendfax/login.config
file has the following in it:/AutoPPP/ - - /etc/ppp/ppp-pap-dialupThis will tell mgetty to run the
ppp-pap-dialup script for detected PPP
connections.Create a file called
/etc/ppp/ppp-pap-dialup containing the
following (the file should be executable):#!/bin/sh
exec /usr/sbin/ppp -direct pap$IDENTFor each dialup line enabled in
/etc/ttys, create a corresponding entry
in /etc/ppp/ppp.conf. This will
happily co-exist with the definitions we created
above.pap:
enable pap
set ifaddr 203.14.100.1 203.14.100.20-203.14.100.40
enable proxyEach user logging in with this method will need to have
a username/password in
/etc/ppp/ppp.secret file, or
alternatively add the following option to authenticate users
via PAP from /etc/password file.enable passwdauthIf you wish to assign some users a static IP number, you
can specify the number as the third argument in
/etc/ppp/ppp.secret. See
/usr/share/examples/ppp/ppp.secret.sample for
examples.MS ExtensionsDNSNetBIOSPPPMicrosoft extensionsIt is possible to configure PPP to supply DNS and
NetBIOS nameserver addresses on demand.To enable these extensions with PPP version 1.x, the
following lines might be added to the relevant section of
/etc/ppp/ppp.conf.enable msext
set ns 203.14.100.1 203.14.100.2
set nbns 203.14.100.5And for PPP version 2 and above:accept dns
set dns 203.14.100.1 203.14.100.2
set nbns 203.14.100.5This will tell the clients the primary and secondary
name server addresses, and a NetBIOS nameserver host.In version 2 and above, if the
set dns line is omitted, PPP will use the
values found in /etc/resolv.conf.PAP and CHAP AuthenticationPAPCHAPSome ISPs set their system up so that the authentication
part of your connection is done using either of the PAP or
CHAP authentication mechanisms. If this is the case, your ISP
will not give a login: prompt when you
connect, but will start talking PPP immediately.PAP is less secure than CHAP, but security is not normally
an issue here as passwords, although being sent as plain text
with PAP, are being transmitted down a serial line only.
There is not much room for crackers to
eavesdrop.Referring back to the PPP
and Static IP addresses or PPP and Dynamic IP addresses
sections, the following alterations must be made:7 set login
…
12 set authname MyUserName
13 set authkey MyPasswordLine 7:Your ISP will not normally require that you log into
the server if you are using PAP or CHAP. You must
therefore disable your set login
string.Line 12:This line specifies your PAP/CHAP user name. You
will need to insert the correct value for
MyUserName.Line 13:passwordThis line specifies your PAP/CHAP password. You
will need to insert the correct value for
MyPassword. You may want to
add an additional line, such as:15 accept PAPor15 accept CHAPto make it obvious that this is the intention, but
PAP and CHAP are both accepted by default.Changing Your ppp Configuration on the
FlyIt is possible to talk to the ppp
program while it is running in the background, but only if a
suitable diagnostic port has been set up. To do this, add the
following line to your configuration:set server /var/run/ppp-tun%d DiagnosticPassword 0177This will tell PPP to listen to the specified Unix-domain
socket, asking clients for the specified password before
allowing access. The %d in the name is
replaced with the tun device number
that is in use.Once a socket has been set up, the &man.pppctl.8; program
may be used in scripts that wish to manipulate the running
program.Final System ConfigurationPPPconfigurationYou now have ppp configured, but there
are a few more things to do before it is ready to work. They
all involve editing the /etc/rc.conf
file.Working from the top down in this file, make sure the
hostname= line is set, e.g.:hostname="foo.example.com"If your ISP has supplied you with a static IP address and
name, it is probably best that you use this name as your host
name.Look for the network_interfaces variable.
If you want to configure your system to dial your ISP on demand,
make sure the tun0 device is added to
the list, otherwise remove it.network_interfaces="lo0 tun0" ifconfig_tun0=The ifconfig_tun0 variable should be
empty, and a file called
/etc/start_if.tun0 should be created.
This file should contain the line:ppp -auto mysystemThis script is executed at network configuration time,
starting your ppp daemon in automatic mode. If you have a LAN
for which this machine is a gateway, you may also wish to use
the switch. Refer to the manual page
for further details.Set the router program to NO with
following line in your
/etc/rc.conf:router_enable="NO"routedIt is important that the routed daemon is
not started (it is started by default), as
routed tends to delete the default routing
table entries created by ppp.It is probably worth your while ensuring that the
sendmail_flags line does not include the
option, otherwise
sendmail will attempt to do a network lookup
every now and then, possibly causing your machine to dial out.
You may try:sendmail_flags="-bd"sendmailThe downside of this is that you must force
sendmail to re-examine the mail queue
whenever the ppp link is up by typing:&prompt.root; /usr/sbin/sendmail -qYou may wish to use the !bg command in
ppp.linkup to do this automatically:1 provider:
2 delete ALL
3 add 0 0 HISADDR
4 !bg sendmail -bd -q30mSMTPIf you do not like this, it is possible to set up a
dfilter to block SMTP traffic. Refer to the
sample files for further details.Now the only thing left to do is reboot the machine.All that is left is to reboot the machine. After rebooting,
you can now either type:&prompt.root; pppand then dial provider to start the PPP
session, or, if you want ppp to establish
sessions automatically when there is outbound traffic (and
you have not created the start_if.tun0
script), type:&prompt.root; ppp -auto providerSummaryTo recap, the following steps are necessary when setting up
ppp for the first time:Client side:Ensure that the tun device is
built into your kernel.Ensure that the
tunX device
file is available in the /dev
directory.Create an entry in
/etc/ppp/ppp.conf. The
pmdemand example should suffice for
most ISPs.If you have a dynamic IP address, create an entry in
/etc/ppp/ppp.linkup.Update your /etc/rc.conf
file.Create a start_if.tun0 script if
you require demand dialing.Server side:Ensure that the tun device is
built into your kernel.Ensure that the
tunX device
file is available in the /dev
directory.Create an entry in /etc/passwd
(using the &man.vipw.8; program).Create a profile in this users home directory that runs
ppp -direct direct-server or
similar.Create an entry in
/etc/ppp/ppp.conf. The
direct-server example should
suffice.Create an entry in
/etc/ppp/ppp.linkup.Update your /etc/rc.conf
file.Gennady B.SorokopudParts originally contributed by RobertHuffUsing Kernel PPPSetting up Kernel PPPPPPkernel PPPBefore you start setting up PPP on your machine make sure
that pppd is located in
/usr/sbin and the directory
/etc/ppp exists.pppd can work in two modes:As a client — you want to connect your
machine to the outside world via a PPP serial connection or
modem line.PPPserveras a server — your machine is located on
the network and used to connect other computers using
PPP.In both cases you will need to set up an options file
(/etc/ppp/options or
~/.ppprc if you have more than one user on
your machine that uses PPP).You also will need some modem/serial software (preferably
kermit) so you can dial and establish a connection with the
remote host.TrevRoydhouseBased on information provided by Using pppd as a ClientPPPclientCiscoThe following /etc/ppp/options might be
used to connect to a CISCO terminal server PPP line.crtscts # enable hardware flow control
modem # modem control line
noipdefault # remote PPP server must supply your IP address.
# if the remote host doesn't send your IP during IPCP
# negotiation , remove this option
passive # wait for LCP packets
domain ppp.foo.com # put your domain name here
:<remote_ip> # put the IP of remote PPP host here
# it will be used to route packets via PPP link
# if you didn't specified the noipdefault option
# change this line to <local_ip>:<remote_ip>
defaultroute # put this if you want that PPP server will be your
# default routerTo connect:kermitmodemDial to the remote host using kermit (or some other modem
program), and enter your user name and password (or whatever
is needed to enable PPP on the remote host).Exit kermit (without hanging up the line).Enter the following:&prompt.root; /usr/src/usr.sbin/pppd.new/pppd /dev/tty0119200Be sure to use the appropriate speed and device name.Now your computer is connected with PPP. If the connection
fails, you can add the option to the
/etc/ppp/options file and check messages on
the console to track the problem.Following /etc/ppp/pppup script will make
all 3 stages automatically:#!/bin/sh
ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing pppd, PID=' ${pid}
kill ${pid}
fi
ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing kermit, PID=' ${pid}
kill -9 ${pid}
fi
ifconfig ppp0 down
ifconfig ppp0 delete
kermit -y /etc/ppp/kermit.dial
pppd /dev/tty01 19200kermit/etc/ppp/kermit.dial is a kermit script
that dials and makes all necessary authorization on the remote
host (an example of such a script is attached to the end of this
document).Use the following /etc/ppp/pppdown script
to disconnect the PPP line:#!/bin/sh
pid=`ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ X${pid} != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing pppd, PID=' ${pid}
kill -TERM ${pid}
fi
ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing kermit, PID=' ${pid}
kill -9 ${pid}
fi
/sbin/ifconfig ppp0 down
/sbin/ifconfig ppp0 delete
kermit -y /etc/ppp/kermit.hup
/etc/ppp/ppptestCheck to see if PPP is still running by executing
/usr/etc/ppp/ppptest, which should look like
this:#!/bin/sh
pid=`ps ax| grep pppd |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ X${pid} != "X" ] ; then
echo 'pppd running: PID=' ${pid-NONE}
else
echo 'No pppd running.'
fi
set -x
netstat -n -I ppp0
ifconfig ppp0To hang up the modem, execute
/etc/ppp/kermit.hup, which should
contain:set line /dev/tty01 ; put your modem device here
set speed 19200
set file type binary
set file names literal
set win 8
set rec pack 1024
set send pack 1024
set block 3
set term bytesize 8
set command bytesize 8
set flow none
pau 1
out +++
inp 5 OK
out ATH0\13
echo \13
exitHere is an alternate method using chat
instead of kermit.The following two files are sufficient to accomplish a
pppd connection./etc/ppp/options:/dev/cuaa1 115200
crtscts # enable hardware flow control
modem # modem control line
connect "/usr/bin/chat -f /etc/ppp/login.chat.script"
noipdefault # remote PPP serve must supply your IP address.
# if the remote host doesn't send your IP during
# IPCP negotiation, remove this option
passive # wait for LCP packets
domain <your.domain> # put your domain name here
: # put the IP of remote PPP host here
# it will be used to route packets via PPP link
# if you didn't specified the noipdefault option
# change this line to <local_ip>:<remote_ip>
defaultroute # put this if you want that PPP server will be
# your default router/etc/ppp/login.chat.script:The following should go on a single line.ABORT BUSY ABORT 'NO CARRIER' "" AT OK ATDT<phone.number>
CONNECT "" TIMEOUT 10 ogin:-\\r-ogin: <login-id>
TIMEOUT 5 sword: <password>Once these are installed and modified correctly, all you need
to do is run pppd, like so:&prompt.root; pppdUsing pppd as a Server/etc/ppp/options should contain something
similar to the following:crtscts # Hardware flow control
netmask 255.255.255.0 # netmask ( not required )
192.114.208.20:192.114.208.165 # ip's of local and remote hosts
# local ip must be different from one
# you assigned to the ethernet ( or other )
# interface on your machine.
# remote IP is ip address that will be
# assigned to the remote machine
domain ppp.foo.com # your domain
passive # wait for LCP
modem # modem lineThe following /etc/ppp/pppserv script
will enable tell pppd to behave as a
server:#!/bin/sh
ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing pppd, PID=' ${pid}
kill ${pid}
fi
ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing kermit, PID=' ${pid}
kill -9 ${pid}
fi
# reset ppp interface
ifconfig ppp0 down
ifconfig ppp0 delete
# enable autoanswer mode
kermit -y /etc/ppp/kermit.ans
# run ppp
pppd /dev/tty01 19200Use this /etc/ppp/pppservdown script to
stop the server:#!/bin/sh
ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep pppd |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing pppd, PID=' ${pid}
kill ${pid}
fi
ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep
pid=`ps ax |grep kermit |grep -v grep|awk '{print $1;}'`
if [ "X${pid}" != "X" ] ; then
echo 'killing kermit, PID=' ${pid}
kill -9 ${pid}
fi
ifconfig ppp0 down
ifconfig ppp0 delete
kermit -y /etc/ppp/kermit.noansThe following kermit script
(/etc/ppp/kermit.ans) will enable/disable
autoanswer mode on your modem. It should look like this:set line /dev/tty01
set speed 19200
set file type binary
set file names literal
set win 8
set rec pack 1024
set send pack 1024
set block 3
set term bytesize 8
set command bytesize 8
set flow none
pau 1
out +++
inp 5 OK
out ATH0\13
inp 5 OK
echo \13
out ATS0=1\13 ; change this to out ATS0=0\13 if you want to disable
; autoanswer mod
inp 5 OK
echo \13
exitA script named /etc/ppp/kermit.dial is
used for dialing and authenticating on the remote host. You will
need to customize it for your needs. Put your login and password
in this script; you will also need to change the input statement
depending on responses from your modem and remote host.;
; put the com line attached to the modem here:
;
set line /dev/tty01
;
; put the modem speed here:
;
set speed 19200
set file type binary ; full 8 bit file xfer
set file names literal
set win 8
set rec pack 1024
set send pack 1024
set block 3
set term bytesize 8
set command bytesize 8
set flow none
set modem hayes
set dial hangup off
set carrier auto ; Then SET CARRIER if necessary,
set dial display on ; Then SET DIAL if necessary,
set input echo on
set input timeout proceed
set input case ignore
def \%x 0 ; login prompt counter
goto slhup
:slcmd ; put the modem in command mode
echo Put the modem in command mode.
clear ; Clear unread characters from input buffer
pause 1
output +++ ; hayes escape sequence
input 1 OK\13\10 ; wait for OK
if success goto slhup
output \13
pause 1
output at\13
input 1 OK\13\10
if fail goto slcmd ; if modem doesn't answer OK, try again
:slhup ; hang up the phone
clear ; Clear unread characters from input buffer
pause 1
echo Hanging up the phone.
output ath0\13 ; hayes command for on hook
input 2 OK\13\10
if fail goto slcmd ; if no OK answer, put modem in command mode
:sldial ; dial the number
pause 1
echo Dialing.
output atdt9,550311\13\10 ; put phone number here
assign \%x 0 ; zero the time counter
:look
clear ; Clear unread characters from input buffer
increment \%x ; Count the seconds
input 1 {CONNECT }
if success goto sllogin
reinput 1 {NO CARRIER\13\10}
if success goto sldial
reinput 1 {NO DIALTONE\13\10}
if success goto slnodial
reinput 1 {\255}
if success goto slhup
reinput 1 {\127}
if success goto slhup
if < \%x 60 goto look
else goto slhup
:sllogin ; login
assign \%x 0 ; zero the time counter
pause 1
echo Looking for login prompt.
:slloop
increment \%x ; Count the seconds
clear ; Clear unread characters from input buffer
output \13
;
; put your expected login prompt here:
;
input 1 {Username: }
if success goto sluid
reinput 1 {\255}
if success goto slhup
reinput 1 {\127}
if success goto slhup
if < \%x 10 goto slloop ; try 10 times to get a login prompt
else goto slhup ; hang up and start again if 10 failures
:sluid
;
; put your userid here:
;
output ppp-login\13
input 1 {Password: }
;
; put your password here:
;
output ppp-password\13
input 1 {Entering SLIP mode.}
echo
quit
:slnodial
echo \7No dialtone. Check the telephone line!\7
exit 1
; local variables:
; mode: csh
; comment-start: "; "
; comment-start-skip: "; "
; end:JimMockContributed (from http://node.to/freebsd/how-tos/how-to-freebsd-pppoe.html) by Using PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)PPPover EthernetPPPoEPPP, over EthernetThis section describes how to set up PPP over Ethernet
(PPPoE).Configuring the kernelNo kernel configuration is necessary for PPPoE any longer. If
the necessary netgraph support is not built into the kernel, it will
be dynamically loaded by ppp.Setting up ppp.confHere is an example of a working
ppp.conf:default:
set log Phase tun command # you can add more detailed logging if you wish
set ifaddr 10.0.0.1/0 10.0.0.2/0
name_of_service_provider:
set device PPPoE:xl1 # replace xl1 with your ethernet device
set authname YOURLOGINNAME
set authkey YOURPASSWORD
set dial
set login
add default HISADDRRunning PPPAs root, you can run:&prompt.root; ppp -ddial name_of_service_providerStarting PPP at BootAdd the following to your /etc/rc.conf
file:ppp_enable="YES"
ppp_mode="ddial"
ppp_nat="YES" # if you want to enable nat for your local network, otherwise NO
ppp_profile="name_of_service_provider"Using a PPPoE Service tagSometimes it will be necessary to use a service tag to establish
your connection. Service tags are used to distinguish between
different PPPoE servers attached to a given network.You should have been given any required service tag information
in the documentation provided by your ISP. If you cannot locate
it there, ask your ISP's tech support personnel.As a last resort, you could try the method suggested by the
Roaring Penguin
PPPoE program which can be found in the ports collection. Bear in mind however,
this may de-program your modem and render it useless, so
think twice before doing it. Simply install the program shipped
with the modem by your provider. Then, access the
System menu from the program. The name of your
profile should be listed there. It is usually
ISP.The profile name (service tag) will be used in the PPPoE
configuration entry in ppp.conf as the provider
part of the set device command (see the &man.ppp.8;
manual page for full details). It should look like this:set device PPPoE:xl1:ISPDo not forget to change xl1
to the proper device for your Ethernet card.Do not forget to change ISP
to the profile you have just found above.For additional information, see:Cheaper Broadband with FreeBSD on
DSL by Renaud Waldura in Daemon
News.PPPoE with a 3Com HomeConnect ADSL Modem Dual LinkThis modem does not follow RFC 2516
(A Method for transmitting PPP over Ethernet
(PPPoE), written by L. Mamakos, K. Lidl, J. Evarts,
D. Carrel, D. Simone, and R. Wheeler). Instead, different packet
type codes have been used for the Ethernet frames. Please complain
to 3Com if you think it
should comply with the PPPoE specification.In order to make FreeBSD capable of communicating with this
device, a sysctl must be set. This can be done automatically at
boot time by updating /etc/sysctl.conf:net.graph.nonstandard_pppoe=1or can be done for immediate effect with the command
sysctl -w net.graph.nonstandard_pppoe=1.Unfortunately, because this is a system-wide setting, it is
not possible to talk to a normal PPPoE client or server and a
3Com HomeConnect ADSL Modem at the same time.Using PPP over ATM (PPPoA)PPPover ATMPPPoAPPP, over ATMThe following describes how to set up PPP over ATM (PPPoA).
PPPoA is a popular choice among European DSL providers.Using PPPoA with the Alcatel Speedtouch USBPPPoA support for this device is supplied as a port in FreeBSD
because the firmware is distributed under Alcatel's
license agreement and can not be redistributed freely with the
base system of FreeBSD.To install the software, simply use the ports collection. Install the
net/pppoa port and follow the
instructions provided with it.Using mpdYou can use mpd to connect to a variety
of services, in particular pptp services. You can find
mpd in the ports collection,
net/mpd.First you must install the port, and then you can configure
mpd to suit your requirements and provider
settings. The port places a set of sample configuration files which
are well documented in
PREFIX/etc/mpd/. Note
here that PREFIX means the directory into which
your ports are installed, this defaults to
- /usr/local/. A complete guide to to configuring
+ /usr/local/. A complete guide to configuring
mpd is available in HTML format once the
port has been installed. It is placed in
PREFIX/share/mpd/.
Here is a sample configuration for connecting to an ADSL service with
mpd. The configuration is spread over two
files, first the mpd.conf.default:
load adsl
l:
new -i ng0 adsl adsl
set bundle authname username
set bundle password password
set bundle disable multilink
set link no pap actcomp protocomp
set link disable chap
set link accept chap
set link keep-alive 30 10
set ipcp no vjcomp
set ipcp ranges 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0
set iface route default
set iface disable on-demand
set iface enable proxy-arp
set iface idle 0
openThe username used to authenticate with your ISP.The password used to authenticate with your ISP.The mpd.links file contains information about
the link, or links, you wish to establish. An example
mpd.links to accompany the above example is given
beneath.adsl:
set link type pptp
set pptp mode active
set pptp enable originate incoming outcall
set pptp self 10.0.0.140
set pptp peer 10.0.0.138It is possible to initialise the connection easily by issuing the
following command as root.&prompt.root; mpd -badslYou can see the status of the connection with the following
command.&prompt.user; ifconfig ng0
: flags=88d1<UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING,NOARP,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
inet 216.136.204.117 --> 204.152.186.171 netmask 0xffffffffUsing mpd is the recommended way to
connect to an ADSL service with &os;.Using pptpclientIt is also possible to use FreeBSD to connect to other PPPoA
services using
net/pptpclient.To use net/pptpclient to
connect to a DSL service, install the port or package and edit your
/etc/ppp/ppp.conf. You will need to be
root to perform both of these operations. An
example section of ppp.conf is given
below. For further information on ppp.conf
options consult the ppp manual page,
&man.ppp.8;.adsl:
set log phase chat lcp ipcp ccp tun command
set timeout 0
enable dns
set authname username
set authkey password
set ifaddr 0 0
add default HISADDRThe username of your account with the DSL provider.The password for your account.Because you must put your account's password in the
ppp.conf file in plain text form you should
make sure than nobody can read the contents of this file. The
following series of commands will make sure the file is only
readable by the root account. Refer to the
manuals pages for &man.chmod.1; and &man.chown.8; for further
information.&prompt.root; chown root:wheel /etc/ppp/ppp.conf
&prompt.root; chmod 600 /etc/ppp/ppp.confThis will open a tunnel for a PPP session to your DSL router.
Ethernet DSL modems have a preconfigured LAN IP address which you
connect to. In the case of the Alcatel Speedtouch Home this address is
10.0.0.138. Your routers documentation
should tell you which address your device uses. To open the tunnel and
start a ppp session execute the following
command.&prompt.root; pptp addressispYou may wish to add an ampersand (&) to the
end of the previous command because pptp
will not return your prompt to you otherwise.A tun virtual tunnel device will be
created for interaction between the pptp
and ppp processes. Once you have been
returned to your prompt, or the pptp
process has confirmed a connection you can examine the tunnel like
so.&prompt.user; ifconfig tun0
tun0: flags=8051<UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
inet 216.136.204.21 --> 204.152.186.171 netmask 0xffffff00
Opened by PID 918If you are unable to connect, check the configuration of
your router, which is usually accessible via
telnet or with a web browser. If you still
cannot connect you should examine the output of the
pptp command and the contents of the
ppp log file,
/var/log/ppp.log for clues.SatoshiAsamiOriginally contributed by GuyHelmerWith input from PieroSeriniUsing SLIPSLIPSetting up a SLIP ClientSLIPclientThe following is one way to set up a FreeBSD machine for SLIP
on a static host network. For dynamic hostname assignments (your
address changes each time you dial up), you probably need to
have a more complex setup.First, determine which serial port your modem is connected to.
Many people setup a symbolic link, such as
/dev/modem, to point to the real device name,
/dev/cuaaN. This allows you to
abstract the actual device name should you ever need to move
the modem to a different port. It can become quite cumbersome when you
need to fix a bunch of files in /etc and
.kermrc files all over the system!/dev/cuaa0 is
COM1, cuaa1 is
COM2, etc.Make sure you have the following in your kernel configuration
file:pseudo-device sl 1It is included in the GENERIC kernel, so
this should not be a problem unless you have deleted it.Things You Have to Do Only OnceAdd your home machine, the gateway and nameservers to
your /etc/hosts file. Mine looks like
this:127.0.0.1 localhost loghost
136.152.64.181 water.CS.Example.EDU water.CS water
136.152.64.1 inr-3.CS.Example.EDU inr-3 slip-gateway
128.32.136.9 ns1.Example.EDU ns1
128.32.136.12 ns2.Example.EDU ns2Make sure you have before
in your
/etc/host.conf. Otherwise, funny
things may happen.Edit the /etc/rc.conf file.Set your hostname by editing the line that
says:hostname=myname.my.domainYour machine's full Internet hostname should be
placed here.Add sl0 to the list of
network interfaces by changing the line that
says:network_interfaces="lo0"to:network_interfaces=lo0 sl0Set the startup flags of sl0 by adding a
line:ifconfig_sl0="inet ${hostname} slip-gateway netmask 0xffffff00 up"default routeDesignate the default router by changing the
line:defaultrouter=NOto:defaultrouter=slip-gatewayMake a file /etc/resolv.conf which
contains:domain CS.Example.EDU
nameserver 128.32.136.9
nameserver 128.32.136.12nameserverdomain nameAs you can see, these set up the nameserver hosts. Of
course, the actual domain names and addresses depend on your
environment.Set the password for root and
toor (and any other
accounts that do not have a password).Reboot your machine and make sure it comes up with the
correct hostname.Making a SLIP ConnectionSLIPconnecting withDial up, type slip at the prompt,
enter your machine name and password. What is required to
be entered depends on your environment. If you use
kermit, you can try a script like this:# kermit setup
set modem hayes
set line /dev/modem
set speed 115200
set parity none
set flow rts/cts
set terminal bytesize 8
set file type binary
# The next macro will dial up and login
define slip dial 643-9600, input 10 =>, if failure stop, -
output slip\x0d, input 10 Username:, if failure stop, -
output silvia\x0d, input 10 Password:, if failure stop, -
output ***\x0d, echo \x0aCONNECTED\x0aOf course, you have to change the hostname and password
to fit yours. After doing so, you can just type
slip from the kermit prompt to
connect.Leaving your password in plain text anywhere in the
filesystem is generally a bad idea.
Do it at your own risk.Leave the kermit there (you can suspend it by
Ctrlz) and as root, type:&prompt.root; slattach -h -c -s 115200 /dev/modemIf you are able to ping hosts on the
other side of the router, you are connected! If it does not
work, you might want to try instead of
as an argument to
slattach.How to Shutdown the ConnectionDo the following:&prompt.root; kill -INT `cat /var/run/slattach.modem.pid`to kill slattach. Keep in mind you must be
root to do the above. Then go back to
kermit (by running fg if you suspended it) and
exit from
it (q).The slattach manual page says you have
to use ifconfig sl0 down
to mark the interface down, but this does not
seem to make any difference for me.
(ifconfig sl0 reports the same thing.)Some times, your modem might refuse to drop the carrier
(mine often does). In that case, simply start kermit and quit
it again. It usually goes out on the second try.TroubleshootingIf it does not work, feel free to ask me. The things that
people tripped over so far:Not using or in
slattach (This should not be fatal,
but some users have reported that this solves their
problems.)Using instead of
(might be hard to see the difference on
some fonts).Try ifconfig sl0 to see your
interface status. For example, you might get:&prompt.root; ifconfig sl0
sl0: flags=10<POINTOPOINT>
inet 136.152.64.181 --> 136.152.64.1 netmask ffffff00Also, netstat -r will give the
routing table, in case you get the no route to
host messages from ping. An example shown here:&prompt.root; netstat -r
Routing tables
Destination Gateway Flags Refs Use IfaceMTU Rtt Netmasks:
(root node)
(root node)
Route Tree for Protocol Family inet:
(root node) =>
default inr-3.Example.EDU UG 8 224515 sl0 - -
localhost.Exampl localhost.Example. UH 5 42127 lo0 - 0.438
inr-3.Example.ED water.CS.Example.E UH 1 0 sl0 - -
water.CS.Example localhost.Example. UGH 34 47641234 lo0 - 0.438
(root node)This is after the link has been up for a while, the numbers
on your system will vary.Setting up a SLIP ServerSLIPserverThis document provides suggestions for setting up SLIP Server
services on a FreeBSD system, which typically means configuring
your system to automatically startup connections upon login for
remote SLIP clients.PrerequisitesTCP/IP networkingThis section is very technical in nature, so background
knowledge is required. It is assumed that you are familiar with
the TCP/IP network protocol, and in particular, network and node
addressing, network address masks, subnetting, routing, and
routing protocols, such as RIP. Configuring SLIP services on a
dial-up server requires a knowledge of these concepts, and if
you are not familiar with them, please read a copy of either
Craig Hunt's TCP/IP Network Administration
published by O'Reilly & Associates, Inc. (ISBN Number
0-937175-82-X), or Douglas Comer's books on the TCP/IP
protocol.modemIt is further assumed that you have already setup your
modem(s) and configured the appropriate system files to allow
logins through your modems. If you have not prepared your
system for this yet, please see the tutorial for configuring
dialup services; if you have a World-Wide Web browser available,
browse the list of tutorials at http://www.FreeBSD.org/.
You may also want to check the manual pages for &man.sio.4; for
information on the serial port device driver and &man.ttys.5;,
&man.gettytab.5;, &man.getty.8;, & &man.init.8; for
information relevant to configuring the system to accept logins
on modems, and perhaps &man.stty.1; for information on setting
serial port parameters (such as clocal for
directly-connected serial interfaces).Quick OverviewIn its typical configuration, using FreeBSD as a SLIP server
works as follows: a SLIP user dials up your FreeBSD SLIP Server
system and logs in with a special SLIP login ID that uses
/usr/sbin/sliplogin as the special user's
shell. The sliplogin program browses the
file /etc/sliphome/slip.hosts to find a
matching line for the special user, and if it finds a match,
connects the serial line to an available SLIP interface and then
runs the shell script
/etc/sliphome/slip.login to configure the
SLIP interface.An Example of a SLIP Server LoginFor example, if a SLIP user ID were
Shelmerg, Shelmerg's
entry in /etc/master.passwd would look
something like this:Shelmerg:password:1964:89::0:0:Guy Helmer - SLIP:/usr/users/Shelmerg:/usr/sbin/sliploginWhen Shelmerg logs in,
sliplogin will search
/etc/sliphome/slip.hosts for a line that
had a matching user ID; for example, there may be a line in
/etc/sliphome/slip.hosts that
reads:Shelmerg dc-slip sl-helmer 0xfffffc00 autocompsliplogin will find that matching line,
hook the serial line into the next available SLIP interface,
and then execute /etc/sliphome/slip.login
like this:/etc/sliphome/slip.login 0 19200 Shelmerg dc-slip sl-helmer 0xfffffc00 autocompIf all goes well,
/etc/sliphome/slip.login will issue an
ifconfig for the SLIP interface to which
sliplogin attached itself (slip interface
0, in the above example, which was the first parameter in the
list given to slip.login) to set the
local IP address (dc-slip), remote IP address
(sl-helmer), network mask for the SLIP
interface (0xfffffc00), and
any additional flags (autocomp). If
something goes wrong, sliplogin usually
logs good informational messages via the
daemon syslog facility, which usually logs
to /var/log/messages (see the manual
pages for &man.syslogd.8; and &man.syslog.conf.5; and perhaps
check /etc/syslog.conf to see to what
syslogd is logging and where it is
logging to.OK, enough of the examples — let us dive into
setting up the system.Kernel ConfigurationkernelconfigurationFreeBSD's default kernels usually come with two SLIP
interfaces defined (sl0 and
sl1); you can use netstat
-i to see whether these interfaces are defined in your
kernel.Sample output from netstat -i:Name Mtu Network Address Ipkts Ierrs Opkts Oerrs Coll
ed0 1500 <Link>0.0.c0.2c.5f.4a 291311 0 174209 0 133
ed0 1500 138.247.224 ivory 291311 0 174209 0 133
lo0 65535 <Link> 79 0 79 0 0
lo0 65535 loop localhost 79 0 79 0 0
sl0* 296 <Link> 0 0 0 0 0
sl1* 296 <Link> 0 0 0 0 0The sl0 and
sl1 interfaces shown from
netstat -i indicate that there are
two SLIP interfaces built into the kernel. (The asterisks after
the sl0 and sl1 indicate
that the interfaces are down.)However, FreeBSD's default kernel does not come configured
to forward packets (by default, your FreeBSD machine will not act
as a
router) due to Internet RFC requirements for Internet hosts (see
RFCs 1009 [Requirements for Internet Gateways], 1122
[Requirements for Internet Hosts — Communication Layers],
and perhaps 1127 [A Perspective on the Host Requirements RFCs]).
If you want your FreeBSD SLIP Server to act as a router, you
will have to edit the /etc/rc.conf file and
change the setting of the gateway_enable variable to
.You will then need to reboot for the new settings to take
effect.You will notice that near the end of the default kernel
configuration file (/sys/i386/conf/GENERIC)
is a line that reads:pseudo-device sl 2SLIPThis is the line that defines the number of SLIP devices
available in the kernel; the number at the end of the line is
the maximum number of SLIP connections that may be operating
simultaneously.Please refer to on
Configuring the FreeBSD Kernel for help in
reconfiguring your kernel.Sliplogin ConfigurationAs mentioned earlier, there are three files in the
/etc/sliphome directory that are part of
the configuration for /usr/sbin/sliplogin
(see &man.sliplogin.8; for the actual manual page for
sliplogin): slip.hosts,
which defines the SLIP users & their associated IP
addresses; slip.login, which usually just
configures the SLIP interface; and (optionally)
slip.logout, which undoes
slip.login's effects when the serial
connection is terminated.slip.hosts Configuration/etc/sliphome/slip.hosts contains
lines which have at least four items separated by
whitespace:SLIP user's login IDLocal address (local to the SLIP server) of the SLIP
linkRemote address of the SLIP linkNetwork maskThe local and remote addresses may be host names (resolved
to IP addresses by /etc/hosts or by the
domain name service, depending on your specifications in
/etc/host.conf), and the
network mask may be a name that can be resolved by a lookup
into /etc/networks. On a sample system,
/etc/sliphome/slip.hosts looks like
this:#
# login local-addr remote-addr mask opt1 opt2
# (normal,compress,noicmp)
#
Shelmerg dc-slip sl-helmerg 0xfffffc00 autocompAt the end of the line is one or more of the
options. — no header
compression — compress
headers — compress headers if
the remote end allows it — disable ICMP packets
(so any ping packets will be dropped instead
of using up your bandwidth)SLIPTCP/IP networkingYour choice of local and remote addresses for your SLIP
links depends on whether you are going to dedicate a TCP/IP
subnet or if you are going to use proxy ARP on
your SLIP server (it is not true proxy ARP, but
that is the terminology used in this section to describe it).
If you are not sure which method to select or how to assign IP
addresses, please refer to the TCP/IP books referenced in
the SLIP Prerequisites ()
and/or consult your IP network manager.gatedIf you are going to use a separate subnet for your SLIP
clients, you will need to allocate the subnet number out of
your assigned IP network number and assign each of your SLIP
client's IP numbers out of that subnet. Then, you will
probably either need to configure a static route to the SLIP
subnet via your SLIP server on your nearest IP router, or
install gated on your FreeBSD SLIP server
and configure it to talk the appropriate routing protocols to
your other routers to inform them about your SLIP server's
route to the SLIP subnet.EthernetOtherwise, if you will use the proxy ARP
method, you will need to assign your SLIP client's IP
addresses out of your SLIP server's Ethernet subnet, and you
will also need to adjust your
/etc/sliphome/slip.login and
/etc/sliphome/slip.logout scripts to use
&man.arp.8; to manage the proxy-ARP entries in the SLIP
server's ARP table.slip.login ConfigurationThe typical /etc/sliphome/slip.login
file looks like this:#!/bin/sh -
#
# @(#)slip.login 5.1 (Berkeley) 7/1/90
#
# generic login file for a slip line. sliplogin invokes this with
# the parameters:
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7-n
# slipunit ttyspeed loginname local-addr remote-addr mask opt-args
#
/sbin/ifconfig sl$1 inet $4 $5 netmask $6This slip.login file merely runs
ifconfig for the appropriate SLIP interface
with the local and remote addresses and network mask of the
SLIP interface.If you have decided to use the proxy ARP
method (instead of using a separate subnet for your SLIP
clients), your /etc/sliphome/slip.login
file will need to look something like this:#!/bin/sh -
#
# @(#)slip.login 5.1 (Berkeley) 7/1/90
#
# generic login file for a slip line. sliplogin invokes this with
# the parameters:
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7-n
# slipunit ttyspeed loginname local-addr remote-addr mask opt-args
#
/sbin/ifconfig sl$1 inet $4 $5 netmask $6
# Answer ARP requests for the SLIP client with our Ethernet addr
/usr/sbin/arp -s $5 00:11:22:33:44:55 pubThe additional line in this
slip.login, arp -s
$5 00:11:22:33:44:55 pub, creates an ARP entry
in the SLIP server's ARP table. This ARP entry causes the
SLIP server to respond with the SLIP server's Ethernet MAC
address whenever another IP node on the Ethernet asks to
speak to the SLIP client's IP address.EthernetMAC addressWhen using the example above, be sure to replace the
Ethernet MAC address (00:11:22:33:44:55) with the MAC address of
your system's Ethernet card, or your proxy ARP
will definitely not work! You can discover your SLIP server's
Ethernet MAC address by looking at the results of running
netstat -i; the second line of the output
should look something like:ed0 1500 <Link>0.2.c1.28.5f.4a 191923 0 129457 0 116This indicates that this particular system's Ethernet MAC
address is 00:02:c1:28:5f:4a
— the periods in the Ethernet MAC address given by
netstat -i must be changed to colons and
leading zeros should be added to each single-digit hexadecimal
number to convert the address into the form that &man.arp.8;
desires; see the manual page on &man.arp.8; for complete
information on usage.When you create
/etc/sliphome/slip.login and
/etc/sliphome/slip.logout, the
execute bit (chmod 755
/etc/sliphome/slip.login /etc/sliphome/slip.logout)
must be set, or sliplogin will be unable
to execute it.slip.logout Configuration/etc/sliphome/slip.logout is not
strictly needed (unless you are implementing proxy
ARP), but if you decide to create it, this is an
example of a basic
slip.logout script:#!/bin/sh -
#
# slip.logout
#
# logout file for a slip line. sliplogin invokes this with
# the parameters:
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7-n
# slipunit ttyspeed loginname local-addr remote-addr mask opt-args
#
/sbin/ifconfig sl$1 downIf you are using proxy ARP, you will want to
have /etc/sliphome/slip.logout remove the
ARP entry for the SLIP client:#!/bin/sh -
#
# @(#)slip.logout
#
# logout file for a slip line. sliplogin invokes this with
# the parameters:
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7-n
# slipunit ttyspeed loginname local-addr remote-addr mask opt-args
#
/sbin/ifconfig sl$1 down
# Quit answering ARP requests for the SLIP client
/usr/sbin/arp -d $5The arp -d $5 removes the ARP entry
that the proxy ARPslip.login added when the SLIP client
logged in.It bears repeating: make sure
/etc/sliphome/slip.logout has the execute
bit set after you create it (ie, chmod 755
/etc/sliphome/slip.logout).Routing ConsiderationsSLIProutingIf you are not using the proxy ARP method for
routing packets between your SLIP clients and the rest of your
network (and perhaps the Internet), you will probably either
have to add static routes to your closest default router(s) to
route your SLIP client subnet via your SLIP server, or you will
probably need to install and configure gated
on your FreeBSD SLIP server so that it will tell your routers
via appropriate routing protocols about your SLIP subnet.Static Routesstatic routesAdding static routes to your nearest default routers can
be troublesome (or impossible if you do not have authority to
do so...). If you have a multiple-router network in your
organization, some routers, such as those made by Cisco and Proteon, may
not only need to be configured with the static route to the
SLIP subnet, but also need to be told which static routes to
tell other routers about, so some expertise and
troubleshooting/tweaking may be necessary to get
static-route-based routing to work.Running gatedgatedAn alternative to the headaches of static routes is to
install gated on your FreeBSD SLIP server
and configure it to use the appropriate routing protocols
(RIP/OSPF/BGP/EGP) to tell other routers about your SLIP
subnet. You can use gated from the ports collection or retrieve and build
it yourself from the
GateD anonymous FTP site; the current version
as of this writing is
gated-R3_5Alpha_8.tar.Z, which includes
support for FreeBSD out-of-the-box. Complete
information and documentation on gated is
available on the Web starting at the Merit GateD
Consortium. Compile and install it, and then write a
/etc/gated.conf file to configure your
gated; here is a sample, similar to what the author used on a
FreeBSD SLIP server:#
# gated configuration file for dc.dsu.edu; for gated version 3.5alpha5
# Only broadcast RIP information for xxx.xxx.yy out the ed Ethernet interface
#
#
# tracing options
#
traceoptions "/var/tmp/gated.output" replace size 100k files 2 general ;
rip yes {
interface sl noripout noripin ;
interface ed ripin ripout version 1 ;
traceoptions route ;
} ;
#
# Turn on a bunch of tracing info for the interface to the kernel:
kernel {
traceoptions remnants request routes info interface ;
} ;
#
# Propagate the route to xxx.xxx.yy out the Ethernet interface via RIP
#
export proto rip interface ed {
proto direct {
xxx.xxx.yy mask 255.255.252.0 metric 1; # SLIP connections
} ;
} ;
#
# Accept routes from RIP via ed Ethernet interfaces
import proto rip interface ed {
all ;
} ;RIPThe above sample gated.conf file
broadcasts routing information regarding the SLIP subnet
xxx.xxx.yy via RIP onto the
Ethernet; if you are using a different Ethernet driver than
the ed driver, you will need to
change the references to the ed
interface appropriately. This sample file also sets up
tracing to /var/tmp/gated.output for
debugging gated's activity; you can
certainly turn off the tracing options if
gated works OK for you. You will need to
change the xxx.xxx.yy's into the
network address of your own SLIP subnet (be sure to change the
net mask in the proto direct clause as
well).Once you have installed and configured
gated on your system, you will need to
tell the FreeBSD startup scripts to run
gated in place of
routed. The easiest way to accomplish
this is to set the router and
router_flags variables in
/etc/rc.conf. Please see the manual
page for gated for information on
command-line parameters.
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml
index fa8e6c6a75..9190102ac1 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,3491 +1,3491 @@
MatthewDillonMuch of this chapter has been taken from the
security(7) manual page by SecuritysecuritySynopsisThis chapter will provide a basic introduction to system security
concepts, some general good rules of thumb, and some advanced topics
under FreeBSD. A lot of the topics covered here can be applied
to system and Internet security in general as well. The Internet
is no longer a friendly place in which everyone
wants to be your kind neighbor. Securing your system is imperative
to protect your data, intellectual property, time, and much more
from the hands of hackers and the like.FreeBSD provides an array of utilities and mechanisms to
ensure the integrity and security of your system and
network.After reading this chapter, you will know:Basic system security concepts, in respect to FreeBSD.About the various crypt mechanisms available in FreeBSD,
such as DES and MD5.How to setup S/Key, an alternative, one-time password
authentication system.How to setup Kerberos, another alternative
authentication system.How to create firewalls using IPFW.How to configure IPSec.How to configure and use OpenSSH, FreeBSD's SSH
implementation.Before reading this chapter, you should:Understand basic FreeBSD and Internet concepts.IntroductionSecurity is a function that begins and ends with the system
administrator. While all BSD Unix multi-user systems have some
inherent security, the job of building and maintaining additional
security mechanisms to keep those users honest is
probably one of the single largest undertakings of the sysadmin.
Machines are only as secure as you make them, and security concerns
are ever competing with the human necessity for convenience. Unix
systems, in general, are capable of running a huge number of
simultaneous processes and many of these processes operate as
servers – meaning that external entities can connect and talk
to them. As yesterday's mini-computers and mainframes become
today's desktops, and as computers become networked and
internetworked, security becomes an even bigger issue.Security is best implemented through a layered
onion approach. In a nutshell, what you want to do is
to create as many layers of security as are convenient and then
carefully monitor the system for intrusions. You do not want to
overbuild your security or you will interfere with the detection
side, and detection is one of the single most important aspects of
any security mechanism. For example, it makes little sense to set
the schg flags (see &man.chflags.1;) on every
system binary because
while this may temporarily protect the binaries, it prevents an
attacker who has broken in from making an easily detectable change
that may result in your security mechanisms not detecting the attacker
at all.System security also pertains to dealing with various forms of
attack, including attacks that attempt to crash, or otherwise make a
system unusable, but do not attempt to compromise the
root account (break root).
Security concerns
can be split up into several categories:Denial of service attacks.User account compromises.Root compromise through accessible servers.Root compromise via user accounts.Backdoor creation.DoS attacksDenial of Service (DoS)securityDoS attacksDenial of Service (DoS)Denial of Service (DoS)A denial of service attack is an action that deprives the
machine of needed resources. Typically, DoS attacks are
brute-force mechanisms that attempt to crash or otherwise make a
machine unusable by overwhelming its servers or network stack. Some
DoS attacks try to take advantage of bugs in the networking
stack to crash a machine with a single packet. The latter can only
be fixed by applying a bug fix to the kernel. Attacks on servers
can often be fixed by properly specifying options to limit the load
the servers incur on the system under adverse conditions.
Brute-force network attacks are harder to deal with. A
spoofed-packet attack, for example, is nearly impossible to stop,
short of cutting your system off from the Internet. It may not be
able to take your machine down, but it can saturate your
Internet connection.securityaccount compromisesA user account compromise is even more common than a DoS
attack. Many sysadmins still run standard
telnetd, rlogind,
rshd,
and ftpd servers on their machines.
These servers, by default, do
not operate over encrypted connections. The result is that if you
have any moderate-sized user base, one or more of your users logging
into your system from a remote location (which is the most common
and convenient way to login to a system) will have his or her
password sniffed. The attentive system admin will analyze his
remote access logs looking for suspicious source addresses even for
successful logins.One must always assume that once an attacker has access to a
user account, the attacker can break root.
However, the reality is that in a well secured and maintained system,
access to a user account does not necessarily give the attacker
access to root. The distinction is important
because without access to root the attacker
cannot generally hide his tracks and may, at best, be able to do
nothing more than mess with the user's files, or crash the machine.
User account compromises are very common because users tend not to
take the precautions that sysadmins take.securitybackdoorsSystem administrators must keep in mind that there are
potentially many ways to break root on a machine.
The attacker may know the root password,
the attacker may find a bug in a root-run server and be able
to break root over a network
connection to that server, or the attacker may know of a bug in
a suid-root program that allows the attacker to break
root once he has broken into a user's account.
If an attacker has found a way to break root
on a machine, the attacker may not have a need
to install a backdoor. Many of the root holes
found and closed to date involve a considerable amount of work
by the attacker to cleanup after himself, so most attackers install
backdoors. A backdoor provides the attacker with a way to easily
regain root access to the system, but it
also gives the smart system administrator a convenient way
to detect the intrusion.
Making it impossible for an attacker to install a backdoor may
actually be detrimental to your security, because it will not
close off the hole the attacker found to break in the first
place.Security remedies should always be implemented with a
multi-layered onion peel approach and can be
categorized as follows:Securing root and staff accounts.Securing root – root-run servers
and suid/sgid binaries.Securing user accounts.Securing the password file.Securing the kernel core, raw devices, and
filesystems.Quick detection of inappropriate changes made to the
system.Paranoia.The next section of this chapter will cover the above bullet
items in greater depth.securitysecuringSecuring FreeBSDCommand vs. ProtocolThroughout this document, we will use
bold text to refer to a command or
application. This is used for instances such as ssh, since it is
a protocol as well as command.The sections that follow will cover the methods of securing your
FreeBSD system that were mentioned in the last section of this chapter.Securing the root Account and
Staff AccountssuFirst off, do not bother securing staff accounts if you have
not secured the root account.
Most systems have a password assigned to the root
account. The first thing you do is assume
that the password is always compromised.
This does not mean that you should remove the password. The
password is almost always necessary for console access to the
machine. What it does mean is that you should not make it
possible to use the password outside of the console or possibly
even with the &man.su.1; command. For example, make sure that
your pty's are specified as being insecure in the
/etc/ttys file so that direct
root logins
via telnet or rlogin are
disallowed. If using other login services such as
sshd, make sure that direct
root logins are disabled there as well.
You can do this by editing
your /etc/ssh/sshd_config file, and making
sure that PermitRootLogin is set to
NO. Consider every access method –
services such as FTP often fall through the cracks.
Direct root logins should only be allowed
via the system console.wheelOf course, as a sysadmin you have to be able to get to
root, so we open up a few holes.
But we make sure these holes require additional password
verification to operate. One way to make root
accessible is to add appropriate staff accounts to the
wheel group (in
/etc/group). The staff members placed in the
wheel group are allowed to
su to root.
You should never give staff
members native wheel access by putting them in the
wheel group in their password entry. Staff
accounts should be placed in a staff group, and
then added to the wheel group via the
/etc/group file. Only those staff members
who actually need to have root access
should be placed in the
wheel group. It is also possible, when using
an authentication method such as Kerberos, to use Kerberos'
.k5login file in the root
account to allow a &man.ksu.1; to root
without having to place anyone at all in the
wheel group. This may be the better solution
since the wheel mechanism still allows an
intruder to break root if the intruder
has gotten hold of your
password file and can break into a staff account. While having
the wheel mechanism is better than having
nothing at all, it is not necessarily the safest option.An indirect way to secure staff accounts, and ultimately
root access is to use an alternative
login access method and
do what is known as starring out the encrypted
password for the staff accounts. Using the &man.vipw.8;
command, one can replace each instance of an encrypted password
with a single * character.
This command will update the /etc/master.passwd
file and user/password database to disable password-authenticated
logins.A staff account entry such as:foobar:R9DT/Fa1/LV9U:1000:1000::0:0:Foo Bar:/home/foobar:/usr/local/bin/tcshShould be changed to this:foobar:*:1000:1000::0:0:Foo Bar:/home/foobar:/usr/local/bin/tcshThis change will prevent normal logins from occurring,
since the encrypted password will never match
*. With this done,
staff members must use
another mechanism to authenticate themselves such as
&man.kerberos.1; or &man.ssh.1; using a public/private key
pair. When using something like Kerberos, one generally must
secure the machines which run the Kerberos servers and your
desktop workstation. When using a public/private key pair
with ssh, one must generally secure
the machine used to login from (typically
one's workstation). An additional layer of protection can be
added to the key pair by password protecting the key pair when
creating it with &man.ssh-keygen.1;. Being able to
star out the passwords for staff accounts also
guarantees that staff members can only login through secure
access methods that you have setup. This forces all staff
members to use secure, encrypted connections for all of their
sessions, which closes an important hole used by many
intruders: sniffing the network from an unrelated,
less secure machine.The more indirect security mechanisms also assume that you are
logging in from a more restrictive server to a less restrictive
server. For example, if your main box is running all sorts of
servers, your workstation should not be running any. In order for
your workstation to be reasonably secure you should run as few
servers as possible, up to and including no servers at all, and
you should run a password-protected screen blanker. Of course,
given physical access to a workstation an attacker can break any
sort of security you put on it. This is definitely a problem that
you should consider, but you should also consider the fact that the
vast majority of break-ins occur remotely, over a network, from
people who do not have physical access to your workstation or
servers.KerberosUsing something like Kerberos also gives you the ability to
disable or change the password for a staff account in one place,
and have it immediately effect all the machines on which the staff
member may have an account. If a staff member's account gets
compromised, the ability to instantly change his password on all
machines should not be underrated. With discrete passwords,
changing a password on N machines can be a mess. You can also
impose re-passwording restrictions with Kerberos: not only can a
Kerberos ticket be made to timeout after a while, but the Kerberos
system can require that the user choose a new password after a
certain period of time (say, once a month).Securing Root-run Servers and SUID/SGID BinariesntalkcomsatfingersandboxessshdtelnetdrshdrlogindThe prudent sysadmin only runs the servers he needs to, no
more, no less. Be aware that third party servers are often the
most bug-prone. For example, running an old version of
imapd or
popper is like giving a universal
root ticket out to the entire world.
Never run a server that you have not checked out carefully.
Many servers do not need to be run as root.
For example, the ntalk,
comsat, and
finger daemons can be run in special
user sandboxes. A sandbox is not perfect,
unless you go through a large amount of trouble, but the onion
approach to security still stands: If someone is able to break
in through a server running in a sandbox, they still have to
break out of the sandbox. The more layers the attacker must
break through, the lower the likelihood of his success. Root
holes have historically been found in virtually every server
ever run as root, including basic system servers.
If you are running a machine through which people only login via
sshd and never login via
telnetd or
rshd or
rlogind, then turn off those
services!FreeBSD now defaults to running
ntalkd,
comsat, and
finger in a sandbox. Another program
which may be a candidate for running in a sandbox is &man.named.8;.
/etc/defaults/rc.conf includes the arguments
necessary to run named in a sandbox in a
commented-out form. Depending on whether you are installing a new
system or upgrading an existing system, the special user accounts
used by these sandboxes may not be installed. The prudent
sysadmin would research and implement sandboxes for servers
whenever possible.sendmailThere are a number of other servers that typically do not run
in sandboxes: sendmail,
popper,
imapd, ftpd,
and others. There are alternatives to some of these, but
installing them may require more work than you are willing to
perform (the convenience factor strikes again). You may have to
run these servers as root and rely on other
mechanisms to detect break-ins that might occur through them.The other big potential root holes in a
system are the
suid-root and sgid binaries installed on the system. Most of
these binaries, such as rlogin, reside
in /bin, /sbin,
/usr/bin, or /usr/sbin.
While nothing is 100% safe, the system-default suid and sgid
binaries can be considered reasonably safe. Still,
root holes are occasionally found in these
binaries. A root hole was found in
Xlib in 1998 that made
xterm (which is typically suid)
vulnerable. It is better to be safe than sorry and the prudent
sysadmin will restrict suid binaries, that only staff should run,
to a special group that only staff can access, and get rid of
(chmod 000) any suid binaries that nobody uses.
A server with no display generally does not need an
xterm binary. Sgid binaries can be
almost as dangerous. If an intruder can break an sgid-kmem binary,
the intruder might be able to read /dev/kmem
and thus read the encrypted password file, potentially compromising
any passworded account. Alternatively an intruder who breaks
group kmem can monitor keystrokes sent through
pty's, including pty's used by users who login through secure
methods. An intruder that breaks the tty
group can write to
almost any user's tty. If a user is running a terminal program or
emulator with a keyboard-simulation feature, the intruder can
potentially generate a data stream that causes the user's terminal
to echo a command, which is then run as that user.Securing User AccountsUser accounts are usually the most difficult to secure. While
you can impose Draconian access restrictions on your staff and
star out their passwords, you may not be able to
do so with any general user accounts you might have. If you do
have sufficient control, then you may win out and be able to secure
the user accounts properly. If not, you simply have to be more
vigilant in your monitoring of those accounts. Use of
ssh and Kerberos for user accounts is
more problematic, due to the extra administration and technical
support required, but still a very good solution compared to a
crypted password file.Securing the Password FileThe only sure fire way is to * out as many
passwords as you can and use ssh or
Kerberos for access to those accounts. Even though the encrypted
password file (/etc/spwd.db) can only be read
by root, it may be possible for an intruder
to obtain read access to that file even if the attacker cannot
obtain root-write access.Your security scripts should always check for and report
changes to the password file (see the Checking file integrity section
below).Securing the Kernel Core, Raw Devices, and
FilesystemsIf an attacker breaks root he can do
just about anything, but
there are certain conveniences. For example, most modern kernels
have a packet sniffing device driver built in. Under FreeBSD it
is called the bpf device. An intruder
will commonly attempt to run a packet sniffer on a compromised
machine. You do not need to give the intruder the capability and
most systems do not have the need for the
bpf device compiled in.sysctlBut even if you turn off the bpf
device, you still have
/dev/mem and
/dev/kmem
to worry about. For that matter, the intruder can still write to
raw disk devices. Also, there is another kernel feature called
the module loader, &man.kldload.8;. An enterprising intruder can
use a KLD module to install his own bpf
device, or other sniffing
device, on a running kernel. To avoid these problems you have to
run the kernel at a higher secure level, at least securelevel 1.
The securelevel can be set with a sysctl on
the kern.securelevel variable. Once you have
set the securelevel to 1, write access to raw devices will be
denied and special chflags flags,
such as schg,
will be enforced. You must also ensure that the
schg flag is set on critical startup binaries,
directories, and script files – everything that gets run up
to the point where the securelevel is set. This might be overdoing
it, and upgrading the system is much more difficult when you
operate at a higher secure level. You may compromise and run the
system at a higher secure level but not set the
schg flag for every system file and directory
under the sun. Another possibility is to simply mount
/ and /usr read-only.
It should be noted that being too Draconian in what you attempt to
protect may prevent the all-important detection of an
intrusion.Checking File Integrity: Binaries, Configuration Files,
Etc.When it comes right down to it, you can only protect your core
system configuration and control files so much before the
convenience factor rears its ugly head. For example, using
chflags to set the schg bit
on most of the files in / and
/usr is probably counterproductive, because
while it may protect the files, it also closes a detection window.
The last layer of your security onion is perhaps the most
important – detection. The rest of your security is pretty
much useless (or, worse, presents you with a false sense of
safety) if you cannot detect potential incursions. Half the job
of the onion is to slow down the attacker, rather than stop him, in
order to give the detection side of the equation a chance to catch
him in the act.The best way to detect an incursion is to look for modified,
missing, or unexpected files. The best way to look for modified
files is from another (often centralized) limited-access system.
Writing your security scripts on the extra-secure limited-access
system makes them mostly invisible to potential attackers, and this
is important. In order to take maximum advantage you generally
have to give the limited-access box significant access to the
other machines in the business, usually either by doing a
read-only NFS export of the other machines to the limited-access
box, or by setting up ssh key-pairs to
allow the limited-access box to ssh to
the other machines. Except for its network traffic, NFS is the
least visible method – allowing you to monitor the
filesystems on each client box virtually undetected. If your
limited-access server is connected to the client boxes through a
switch, the NFS method is often the better choice. If your
limited-access server is connected to the client boxes through a
hub, or through several layers of routing, the NFS method may be
too insecure (network-wise) and using
ssh may be the better choice even with
the audit-trail tracks that ssh
lays.Once you give a limited-access box, at least read access to the
client systems it is supposed to monitor, you must write scripts
to do the actual monitoring. Given an NFS mount, you can write
scripts out of simple system utilities such as &man.find.1; and
&man.md5.1;. It is best to physically md5 the client-box files
at least once a day, and to test control files such as those
found in /etc and
/usr/local/etc even more often. When
mismatches are found, relative to the base md5 information the
limited-access machine knows is valid, it should scream at a
sysadmin to go check it out. A good security script will also
check for inappropriate suid binaries and for new or deleted files
on system partitions such as / and
/usr.When using ssh rather than NFS,
writing the security script is much more difficult. You
essentially have to scp the scripts to the client
box in order to
run them, making them visible, and for safety you also need to
scp the binaries (such as find) that those
scripts use. The ssh client on the
client box may already be compromised. All in all, using
ssh may be necessary when running over
insecure links, but it is also a lot harder to deal with.A good security script will also check for changes to user and
staff members access configuration files:
.rhosts, .shosts,
.ssh/authorized_keys and so forth…
files that might fall outside the purview of the
MD5 check.If you have a huge amount of user disk space, it may take too
long to run through every file on those partitions. In this case,
setting mount flags to disallow suid binaries and devices on those
partitions is a good idea. The nodev and
nosuid options (see &man.mount.8;) are what you
want to look into. You should probably scan them anyway, at least
once a week, since the object of this layer is to detect a break-in
whether or not the break-in is effective.Process accounting (see &man.accton.8;) is a relatively
low-overhead feature of the operating system which might help
as a post-break-in evaluation mechanism. It is especially
useful in tracking down how an intruder has actually broken into
a system, assuming the file is still intact after the break-in
occurs.Finally, security scripts should process the log files, and the
logs themselves should be generated in as secure a manner as
possible – remote syslog can be very useful. An intruder
tries to cover his tracks, and log files are critical to the
sysadmin trying to track down the time and method of the initial
break-in. One way to keep a permanent record of the log files is
to run the system console to a serial port and collect the
information on a continuing basis through a secure machine
monitoring the consoles.ParanoiaA little paranoia never hurts. As a rule, a sysadmin can add
any number of security features, as long as they do not effect
convenience, and can add security features that
do effect convenience with some added thought.
Even more importantly, a security administrator should mix it up a
bit – if you use recommendations such as those given by this
document verbatim, you give away your methodologies to the
prospective attacker who also has access to this document.Denial of Service AttacksDenial of Service (DoS)This section covers Denial of Service attacks. A DoS attack
is typically a packet attack. While there is not much you can do
about modern spoofed packet attacks that saturate your network,
you can generally limit the damage by ensuring that the attacks
cannot take down your servers.Limiting server forks.Limiting springboard attacks (ICMP response attacks, ping
broadcast, etc.).Kernel Route Cache.A common DoS attack is against a forking server that attempts
to cause the server to eat processes, file descriptors, and memory,
until the machine dies. inetd
(see &man.inetd.8;) has several
options to limit this sort of attack. It should be noted that
while it is possible to prevent a machine from going down, it is
not generally possible to prevent a service from being disrupted
by the attack. Read the inetd manual
page carefully and pay
specific attention to the , ,
and options. Note that spoofed-IP attacks
will circumvent the option to
inetd, so
typically a combination of options must be used. Some standalone
servers have self-fork-limitation parameters.Sendmail has its
option, which tends to work
much better than trying to use sendmail's load limiting options
due to the load lag. You should specify a
MaxDaemonChildren parameter, when you start
sendmail, high enough to handle your
expected load, but not so high that the computer cannot handle that
number of sendmails without falling on
its face. It is also prudent to run sendmail in queued mode
() and to run the daemon
(sendmail -bd) separate from the queue-runs
(sendmail -q15m). If you still want real-time
delivery you can run the queue at a much lower interval, such as
, but be sure to specify a reasonable
MaxDaemonChildren option for
that sendmail to prevent cascade failures.Syslogd can be attacked directly
and it is strongly recommended that you use the
option whenever possible, and the option
otherwise.You should also be fairly careful with connect-back services
such as tcpwrapper's reverse-identd,
which can be attacked directly. You generally do not want to use
the reverse-ident feature of
tcpwrappers for this reason.It is a very good idea to protect internal services from
external access by firewalling them off at your border routers.
The idea here is to prevent saturation attacks from outside your
LAN, not so much to protect internal services from network-based
root compromise.
Always configure an exclusive firewall, i.e.,
firewall everything except ports A, B,
C, D, and M-Z. This way you can firewall off all of your
low ports except for certain specific services such as
named (if you are primary for a zone),
ntalkd,
sendmail, and other Internet-accessible
services. If you try to configure the firewall the other way
– as an inclusive or permissive firewall, there is a good
chance that you will forget to close a couple of
services, or that you will add a new internal service and forget
to update the firewall. You can still open up the high-numbered
port range on the firewall, to allow permissive-like operation,
without compromising your low ports. Also take note that FreeBSD
allows you to control the range of port numbers used for dynamic
binding, via the various net.inet.ip.portrangesysctl's (sysctl -a | fgrep
portrange), which can also ease the complexity of your
firewall's configuration. For example, you might use a normal
first/last range of 4000 to 5000, and a hiport range of 49152 to
65535, then block off everything under 4000 in your firewall
(except for certain specific Internet-accessible ports, of
course).ICMP_BANDLIMAnother common DoS attack is called a springboard attack
– to attack a server in a manner that causes the server to
generate responses which overloads the server, the local
network, or some other machine. The most common attack of this
nature is the ICMP ping broadcast attack.
The attacker spoofs ping packets sent to your LAN's broadcast
address with the source IP address set to the actual machine they
wish to attack. If your border routers are not configured to
stomp on ping's to broadcast addresses, your LAN winds up
generating sufficient responses to the spoofed source address to
saturate the victim, especially when the attacker uses the same
trick on several dozen broadcast addresses over several dozen
different networks at once. Broadcast attacks of over a hundred
and twenty megabits have been measured. A second common
springboard attack is against the ICMP error reporting system.
By constructing packets that generate ICMP error responses, an
attacker can saturate a server's incoming network and cause the
server to saturate its outgoing network with ICMP responses. This
type of attack can also crash the server by running it out of
mbuf's, especially if the server cannot drain the ICMP responses
it generates fast enough. The FreeBSD kernel has a new kernel
compile option called
which limits the effectiveness
of these sorts of attacks. The last major class of springboard
attacks is related to certain internal
inetd services such as the
udp echo service. An attacker simply spoofs a UDP packet with the
source address being server A's echo port, and the destination
address being server B's echo port, where server A and B are both
on your LAN. The two servers then bounce this one packet back and
forth between each other. The attacker can overload both servers
and their LANs simply by injecting a few packets in this manner.
Similar problems exist with the internal
chargen port. A
competent sysadmin will turn off all of these inetd-internal test
services.Spoofed packet attacks may also be used to overload the kernel
route cache. Refer to the net.inet.ip.rtexpire,
rtminexpire, and rtmaxcachesysctl parameters. A spoofed packet attack
that uses a random source IP will cause the kernel to generate a
temporary cached route in the route table, viewable with
netstat -rna | fgrep W3. These routes
typically timeout in 1600 seconds or so. If the kernel detects
that the cached route table has gotten too big it will dynamically
reduce the rtexpire but will never decrease it
to less than rtminexpire. There are two
problems:The kernel does not react quickly enough when a lightly
loaded server is suddenly attacked.The rtminexpire is not low enough for
the kernel to survive a sustained attack.If your servers are connected to the Internet via a T3 or
better, it may be prudent to manually override both
rtexpire and rtminexpire
via &man.sysctl.8;. Never set either parameter to zero (unless
you want to crash the machine). Setting both
parameters to 2 seconds should be sufficient to protect the route
table from attack.Access Issues with Kerberos and SSHsshKerberosThere are a few issues with both Kerberos and
ssh that need to be addressed if
you intend to use them. Kerberos V is an excellent
authentication protocol, but there are bugs in the kerberized
telnet and
rlogin applications that make them
unsuitable for dealing with binary streams. Also, by default
Kerberos does not encrypt a session unless you use the
option. ssh
encrypts everything by default.ssh works quite well in every
respect except that it forwards encryption keys by default. What
this means is that if you have a secure workstation holding keys
that give you access to the rest of the system, and you
ssh to an insecure machine, your keys
becomes exposed. The actual keys themselves are not exposed, but
ssh installs a forwarding port for the
duration of your login, and if an attacker has broken
root on the
insecure machine he can utilize that port to use your keys to gain
access to any other machine that your keys unlock.We recommend that you use ssh in
combination with Kerberos whenever possible for staff logins.
ssh can be compiled with Kerberos
support. This reduces your reliance on potentially exposable
ssh keys while at the same time
protecting passwords via Kerberos. ssh
keys should only be used for automated tasks from secure machines
(something that Kerberos is unsuited to do). We also recommend that
you either turn off key-forwarding in the
ssh configuration, or that you make use
of the from=IP/DOMAIN option that
ssh allows in its
authorized_keys file to make the key only
usable to entities logging in from specific machines.BillSwingleParts rewritten and updated by DES, MD5, and CryptsecuritycryptcryptDESMD5Every user on a Unix system has a password associated with
their account. It seems obvious that these passwords need to be
known only to the user and the actual operating system. In
order to keep these passwords secret, they are encrypted with
what is known as a one-way hash, that is, they can
only be easily encrypted but not decrypted. In other words, what
we told you a moment ago was obvious is not even true: the
operating system itself does not really know
the password. It only knows the encrypted
form of the password. The only way to get the
plain-text password is by a brute force search of the
space of possible passwords.Unfortunately the only secure way to encrypt passwords when
Unix came into being was based on DES, the Data Encryption
Standard. This was not such a problem for users resident in
the US, but since the source code for DES could not be exported
outside the US, FreeBSD had to find a way to both comply with
US law and retain compatibility with all the other Unix
variants that still used DES.The solution was to divide up the encryption libraries
so that US users could install the DES libraries and use
DES but international users still had an encryption method
that could be exported abroad. This is how FreeBSD came to
use MD5 as its default encryption method. MD5 is believed to
be more secure than DES, so installing DES is offered primarily
for compatibility reasons.Recognizing Your Crypt MechanismBefore FreeBSD 4.4 libcrypt.a was a
symbolic link pointing to the library which was used for
encryption. FreeBSD 4.4 changed libcrypt.a to
provide a configurable password authentication hash library.
Currently the library supports DES, MD5 and Blowfish hash
functions. By default FreeBSD uses MD5 to encrypt
passwords.It is pretty easy to identify which encryption method
FreeBSD is set up to use. Examining the encrypted passwords in
the /etc/master.passwd file is one way.
Passwords encrypted with the MD5 hash are longer than those
encrypted with the DES hash and also begin with the characters
$1$. Passwords starting with
$2$ are encrypted with the
Blowfish hash function. DES password strings do not
have any particular identifying characteristics, but they are
shorter than MD5 passwords, and are coded in a 64-character
alphabet which does not include the $
character, so a relatively short string which does not begin with
a dollar sign is very likely a DES password.The password format used for new passwords is controlled
by the passwd_format login capability in
/etc/login.conf, which takes values of
des or md5 or
blf. See the &man.login.conf.5; manual page
for more information about login capabilities.S/KeyS/KeysecurityS/KeyS/Key is a one-time password scheme based on a one-way hash
function. FreeBSD uses the MD4 hash for compatibility but other
systems have used MD5 and DES-MAC. S/Key has been part of the
FreeBSD base system since version 1.1.5 and is also used on a
growing number of other operating systems. S/Key is a registered
trademark of Bell Communications Research, Inc.From version 5.0 of FreeBSD, S/Key has been replaced with
the functionally equivalent OPIE (Onetime Passwords In
Everything). OPIE uses the MD5 hash by default.There are three different sorts of passwords which we will talk
about in the discussion below. The first is your usual Unix-style or
Kerberos password; we will call this a Unix password.
The second sort is the one-time password which is generated by the
S/Key key program or the OPIE
opiekey program and accepted by the
keyinit or opiepasswd programs
and the login prompt; we will
call this a one-time password. The final sort of
password is the secret password which you give to the
key/opiekey programs (and
sometimes the
keyinit/opiepasswd programs)
which it uses to generate
one-time passwords; we will call it a secret password
or just unqualified password.The secret password does not have anything to do with your Unix
password; they can be the same but this is not recommended. S/Key
and OPIE secret passwords are not limited to 8 characters like Unix
passwords, they can be as long as you like. Passwords of six or
seven word long phrases are fairly common. For the most part, the
S/Key or OPIE system operates completely independently of the Unix
password system.Besides the password, there are two other pieces of data that
are important to S/Key and OPIE. One is what is known as the
seed or key, consisting of two letters
and five digits. The other is what is called the iteration
count, a number between 1 and 100. S/Key creates the
one-time password by concatenating the seed and the secret password,
then applying the MD4/MD5 hash as many times as specified by the
iteration count and turning the result into six short English words.
These six English words are your one-time password. The
authentication system (primarily PAM) keeps
track of the last one-time password used, and the user is
authenticated if the hash of the user-provided password is equal to
the previous password. Because a one-way hash is used it is
impossible to generate future one-time passwords if a successfully
used password is captured; the iteration count is decremented after
each successful login to keep the user and the login program in
sync. When the iteration count gets down to 1, S/Key and OPIE must be
reinitialized.There are three programs involved in each system
which we will discuss below. The key and
opiekey programs accept an iteration
count, a seed, and a secret password, and generate a one-time
- password or or a consecutive list of one-time passwords. The
+ password or a consecutive list of one-time passwords. The
keyinit and opiepasswd
programs are used to initialize S/Key and OPIE respectively,
and to change passwords, iteration counts, or seeds; they
take either a secret passphrase, or an iteration count,
seed, and one-time password. The keyinfo
and opieinfo programs examine the
relevant credentials files (/etc/skeykeys or
/etc/opiekeys) and print out the invoking user's
current iteration count and seed.There are four different sorts of operations we will cover. The
first is using keyinit or
opiepasswd over a secure connection to set up
one-time-passwords for the first time, or to change your password
or seed. The second operation is using keyinit
or opiepasswd over an insecure connection, in
conjunction with key or opiekey
over a secure connection, to do the same. The third is using
key/opiekey to log in over
an insecure connection. The fourth is using key
or opiekey to generate a number of keys which
can be written down or printed out to carry with you when going to
some location without secure connections to anywhere.Secure Connection InitializationTo initialize S/Key for the first time, change your password,
or change your seed while logged in over a secure connection
(e.g., on the console of a machine or via ssh), use the
keyinit command without any parameters while
logged in as yourself:&prompt.user; keyinit
Adding unfurl:
Reminder - Only use this method if you are directly connected.
If you are using telnet or rlogin exit with no password and use keyinit -s.
Enter secret password:
Again secret password:
ID unfurl s/key is 99 to17757
DEFY CLUB PRO NASH LACE SOFTFor OPIE, opiepasswd is used instead:&prompt.user; opiepasswd -c
[grimreaper] ~ $ opiepasswd -f -c
Adding unfurl:
Only use this method from the console; NEVER from remote. If you are using
telnet, xterm, or a dial-in, type ^C now or exit with no password.
Then run opiepasswd without the -c parameter.
Using MD5 to compute responses.
Enter new secret pass phrase:
Again new secret pass phrase:
ID unfurl OTP key is 499 to4268
MOS MALL GOAT ARM AVID COED
At the Enter new secret pass phrase: or
Enter secret password: prompts, you
should enter a password or phrase. Remember, this is not the
password that you will use to login with, this is used to generate
your one-time login keys. The ID line gives the
parameters of your particular instance; your login name, the
iteration count, and seed. When logging in the system
will remember these parameters and present them back to you so you
do not have to remember them. The last line gives the particular
one-time password which corresponds to those parameters and your
secret password; if you were to re-login immediately, this
one-time password is the one you would use.Insecure Connection InitializationTo initialize or change your secret password over an
insecure connection, you will need to already have a secure
connection to some place where you can run key
or opiekey; this might be in the form of a
desk accessory on a Macintosh, or a shell prompt on a machine you
trust. You will also need to make up an iteration count (100 is
probably a good value), and you may make up your own seed or use a
randomly-generated one. Over on the insecure connection (to the
machine you are initializing), use the keyinit
-s command:&prompt.user; keyinit -s
Updating unfurl:
Old key: to17758
Reminder you need the 6 English words from the key command.
Enter sequence count from 1 to 9999: 100
Enter new key [default to17759]:
s/key 100 to 17759
s/key access password:
s/key access password:CURE MIKE BANE HIM RACY GOREFor OPIE, you need to use opiepasswd:&prompt.user; opiepasswd
Updating unfurl:
You need the response from an OTP generator.
Old secret pass phrase:
otp-md5 498 to4268 ext
Response: GAME GAG WELT OUT DOWN CHAT
New secret pass phrase:
otp-md5 499 to4269
Response: LINE PAP MILK NELL BUOY TROY
ID mark OTP key is 499 gr4269
LINE PAP MILK NELL BUOY TROY
To accept the default seed (which the
keyinit program confusingly calls a
key), press Return.
Then before entering an
access password, move over to your secure connection or S/Key desk
accessory, and give it the same parameters:&prompt.user; key 100 to17759
Reminder - Do not use this program while logged in via telnet or rlogin.
Enter secret password: <secret password>
CURE MIKE BANE HIM RACY GOREOr for OPIE:&prompt.user; opiekey 498 to4268
Using the MD5 algorithm to compute response.
Reminder: Don't use opiekey from telnet or dial-in sessions.
Enter secret pass phrase:
GAME GAG WELT OUT DOWN CHAT
Now switch back over to the insecure connection, and copy the
one-time password generated over to the relevant program.Generating a Single one-time PasswordOnce you have initialized S/Key or OPIE, when you login you will be
presented with a prompt like this:&prompt.user; telnet example.com
Trying 10.0.0.1...
Connected to example.com
Escape character is '^]'.
FreeBSD/i386 (example.com) (ttypa)
login: <username>
s/key 97 fw13894
Password: Or for OPIE:&prompt.user; telnet example.com
Trying 10.0.0.1...
Connected to example.com
Escape character is '^]'.
FreeBSD/i386 (example.com) (ttypa)
login: <username>
otp-md5 498 gr4269 ext
Password: As a side note, the S/Key and OPIE prompts have a useful feature
(not shown here): if you press Return
at the password prompt, the
prompter will turn echo on, so you can see what you are
typing. This can be extremely useful if you are attempting to
type in a password by hand, such as from a printout.MS-DOSWindowsMacOSAt this point you need to generate your one-time password to
answer this login prompt. This must be done on a trusted system
that you can run key or
opiekey on. (There are versions of these for DOS,
Windows and MacOS as well.) They need both the iteration count and
the seed as command line options. You can cut-and-paste these
right from the login prompt on the machine that you are logging
in to.On the trusted system:&prompt.user; key 97 fw13894
Reminder - Do not use this program while logged in via telnet or rlogin.
Enter secret password:
WELD LIP ACTS ENDS ME HAAGFor OPIE:&prompt.user; opiekey 498 to4268
Using the MD5 algorithm to compute response.
Reminder: Don't use opiekey from telnet or dial-in sessions.
Enter secret pass phrase:
GAME GAG WELT OUT DOWN CHATNow that you have your one-time password you can continue
logging in:login: <username>
s/key 97 fw13894
Password: <return to enable echo>
s/key 97 fw13894
Password [echo on]: WELD LIP ACTS ENDS ME HAAG
Last login: Tue Mar 21 11:56:41 from 10.0.0.2 ... Generating Multiple one-time PasswordsSometimes you have to go places where you do not have
access to a trusted machine or secure connection. In this case,
it is possible to use the key command to
generate a number of one-time passwords before hand to be printed
out and taken with you. For example:&prompt.user; key -n 5 30 zz99999
Reminder - Do not use this program while logged in via telnet or rlogin.
Enter secret password: <secret password>
26: SODA RUDE LEA LIND BUDD SILT
27: JILT SPY DUTY GLOW COWL ROT
28: THEM OW COLA RUNT BONG SCOT
29: COT MASH BARR BRIM NAN FLAG
30: CAN KNEE CAST NAME FOLK BILKThe requests five keys in sequence, the
specifies what the last iteration number
should be. Note that these are printed out in
reverse order of eventual use. If you are
really paranoid, you might want to write the results down by hand;
otherwise you can cut-and-paste into lpr. Note
that each line shows both the iteration count and the one-time
password; you may still find it handy to scratch off passwords as
you use them.Restricting Use of Unix PasswordsRestrictions can be placed on the use of Unix passwords based
on the host name, user name, terminal port, or IP address of a
login session. These restrictions can be found in the
configuration file /etc/skey.access. The
&man.skey.access.5; manual page has more information on the complete
format of the file and also details some security cautions to be
aware of before depending on this file for security.If there is no /etc/skey.access file
(this is the FreeBSD default), then all users will be allowed to
use Unix passwords. If the file exists, however, then all users
will be required to use S/Key unless explicitly permitted to do
otherwise by configuration statements in the
skey.access file. In all cases, Unix
passwords are permitted on the console.Here is a sample configuration file which illustrates the
three most common sorts of configuration statements:permit internet 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0
permit user fnord
permit port ttyd0The first line (permit internet) allows
users whose IP source address (which is vulnerable to spoofing)
matches the specified value and mask, to use Unix passwords. This
should not be considered a security mechanism, but rather, a means
to remind authorized users that they are using an insecure network
and need to use S/Key for authentication.The second line (permit user) allows the
specified username, in this case fnord, to use
Unix passwords at any time. Generally speaking, this should only
be used for people who are either unable to use the
key program, like those with dumb terminals, or
those who are uneducable.The third line (permit port) allows all
users logging in on the specified terminal line to use Unix
passwords; this would be used for dial-ups.MarkMurrayContributed by MarkDapozBased on a contribution by KerberosKerberosKerberos is a network add-on system/protocol that allows users to
authenticate themselves through the services of a secure server.
Services such as remote login, remote copy, secure inter-system file
copying and other high-risk tasks are made considerably safer and more
controllable.The following instructions can be used as a guide on how to set up
Kerberos as distributed for FreeBSD. However, you should refer to the
relevant manual pages for a complete description.Installing KerberosMITKerberosinstallingKerberos is an optional component of FreeBSD. The easiest
way to install this software is by selecting the 'krb4' or
'krb5' distribution in sysinstall
during the initial installation of FreeBSD. This will install
the 'eBones' (KerberosIV) or 'Heimdal' (Kerberos5)
implementation of Kerberos. These implementations are
included because they are developed outside the USA/Canada and
were thus available to system owners outside those countries
during the era of restrictive export controls on cryptographic
code from the USA.Alternatively, the MIT implementation of Kerberos is
available from the ports collection as
security/krb5.Creating the Initial DatabaseThis is done on the Kerberos server only. First make sure that
you do not have any old Kerberos databases around. You should change
to the directory /etc/kerberosIV and check that
only the following files are present:&prompt.root; cd /etc/kerberosIV
&prompt.root; ls
README krb.conf krb.realmsIf any additional files (such as principal.*
or master_key) exist, then use the
kdb_destroy command to destroy the old Kerberos
database, or if Kerberos is not running, simply delete the extra
files.You should now edit the krb.conf and
krb.realms files to define your Kerberos realm.
In this case the realm will be EXAMPLE.COM and the
server is grunt.example.com. We edit
or create the krb.conf file:&prompt.root; cat krb.conf
EXAMPLE.COM
EXAMPLE.COM grunt.example.com admin server
CS.BERKELEY.EDU okeeffe.berkeley.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos.mit.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos-1.mit.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos-2.mit.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos-3.mit.edu
LCS.MIT.EDU kerberos.lcs.mit.edu
TELECOM.MIT.EDU bitsy.mit.edu
ARC.NASA.GOV trident.arc.nasa.govIn this case, the other realms do not need to be there. They are
here as an example of how a machine may be made aware of multiple
realms. You may wish to not include them for simplicity.The first line names the realm in which this system works. The
other lines contain realm/host entries. The first item on a line is a
realm, and the second is a host in that realm that is acting as a
key distribution center. The words admin
server following a host's name means that host also
provides an administrative database server. For further explanation
of these terms, please consult the Kerberos manual pages.Now we have to add grunt.example.com
to the EXAMPLE.COM realm and also add an entry to
put all hosts in the .example.com
domain in the EXAMPLE.COM realm. The
krb.realms file would be updated as
follows:&prompt.root; cat krb.realms
grunt.example.com EXAMPLE.COM
.example.com EXAMPLE.COM
.berkeley.edu CS.BERKELEY.EDU
.MIT.EDU ATHENA.MIT.EDU
.mit.edu ATHENA.MIT.EDUAgain, the other realms do not need to be there. They are here as
an example of how a machine may be made aware of multiple realms. You
may wish to remove them to simplify things.The first line puts the specific system into
the named realm. The rest of the lines show how to default systems of
a particular subdomain to a named realm.Now we are ready to create the database. This only needs to run
on the Kerberos server (or Key Distribution Center). Issue the
kdb_init command to do this:&prompt.root; kdb_initRealm name [default ATHENA.MIT.EDU ]:EXAMPLE.COM
You will be prompted for the database Master Password.
It is important that you NOT FORGET this password.
Enter Kerberos master key:Now we have to save the key so that servers on the local machine
can pick it up. Use the kstash command to do
this.&prompt.root; kstashEnter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!This saves the encrypted master password in
/etc/kerberosIV/master_key.Making It All RunTwo principals need to be added to the database for
each system that will be secured with Kerberos.
Their names are kpasswd and rcmd
These two principals are made for each system, with the instance being
the name of the individual system.These daemons, kpasswd and
rcmd allow other systems to change Kerberos
passwords and run commands like rcp,
rlogin and rsh.Now let us add these entries:&prompt.root; kdb_edit
Opening database...
Enter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Previous or default values are in [brackets] ,
enter return to leave the same, or new value.
Principal name:passwdInstance:grunt
<Not found>, Create [y] ?y
Principal: passwd, Instance: grunt, kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Random password [y] ?y
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name:rcmdInstance:grunt
<Not found>, Create [y] ?
Principal: rcmd, Instance: grunt, kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Random password [y] ?
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name: <---- null entry here will cause an exitCreating the Server FileWe now have to extract all the instances which define the
services on each machine. For this we use the
ext_srvtab command. This will create a file
which must be copied or moved by secure
means to each Kerberos client's
/etc/kerberosIV directory. This file must
be present on each server and client, and is crucial to the
operation of Kerberos.&prompt.root; ext_srvtab gruntEnter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Generating 'grunt-new-srvtab'....Now, this command only generates a temporary file which must be
renamed to srvtab so that all the servers can pick
it up. Use the mv command to move it into place on
the original system:&prompt.root; mv grunt-new-srvtab srvtabIf the file is for a client system, and the network is not deemed
safe, then copy the
client-new-srvtab to
removable media and transport it by secure physical means. Be sure to
rename it to srvtab in the client's
/etc/kerberosIV directory, and make sure it is
mode 600:&prompt.root; mv grumble-new-srvtab srvtab
&prompt.root; chmod 600 srvtabPopulating the DatabaseWe now have to add some user entries into the database. First
let us create an entry for the user jane. Use the
kdb_edit command to do this:&prompt.root; kdb_edit
Opening database...
Enter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Previous or default values are in [brackets] ,
enter return to leave the same, or new value.
Principal name:janeInstance:
<Not found>, Create [y] ?y
Principal: jane, Instance: , kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter a secure password here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- re-enter the password here
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name: <---- null entry here will cause an exitTesting It All OutFirst we have to start the Kerberos daemons. NOTE that if you
have correctly edited your /etc/rc.conf then this
will happen automatically when you reboot. This is only necessary on
the Kerberos server. Kerberos clients will automagically get what
they need from the /etc/kerberosIV
directory.&prompt.root; kerberos &
Kerberos server starting
Sleep forever on error
Log file is /var/log/kerberos.log
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Current Kerberos master key version is 1
Local realm: EXAMPLE.COM
&prompt.root; kadmind -n &
KADM Server KADM0.0A initializing
Please do not use 'kill -9' to kill this job, use a
regular kill instead
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!Now we can try using the kinit command to get a
ticket for the id jane that we created
above:&prompt.user; kinit jane
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Kerberos Initialization for "jane"
Password:Try listing the tokens using klist to see if we
really have them:&prompt.user; klist
Ticket file: /tmp/tkt245
Principal: jane@EXAMPLE.COM
Issued Expires Principal
Apr 30 11:23:22 Apr 30 19:23:22 krbtgt.EXAMPLE.COM@EXAMPLE.COMNow try changing the password using passwd to
check if the kpasswd daemon can get
authorization to the Kerberos database:&prompt.user; passwd
realm EXAMPLE.COM
Old password for jane:New Password for jane:
Verifying password
New Password for jane:
Password changed.Adding su PrivilegesKerberos allows us to give each user
who needs root privileges their own
separatesu password.
We could now add an id which is authorized to
su to root. This is
controlled by having an instance of root
associated with a principal. Using kdb_edit
we can create the entry jane.root in the
Kerberos database:&prompt.root; kdb_edit
Opening database...
Enter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Previous or default values are in [brackets] ,
enter return to leave the same, or new value.
Principal name:janeInstance:root
<Not found>, Create [y] ? y
Principal: jane, Instance: root, kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter a SECURE password here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- re-enter the password here
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?12 <--- Keep this short!
Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name: <---- null entry here will cause an exitNow try getting tokens for it to make sure it works:&prompt.root; kinit jane.root
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Kerberos Initialization for "jane.root"
Password:Now we need to add the user to root's
.klogin file:&prompt.root; cat /root/.klogin
jane.root@EXAMPLE.COMNow try doing the su:&prompt.user; suPassword:and take a look at what tokens we have:&prompt.root; klist
Ticket file: /tmp/tkt_root_245
Principal: jane.root@EXAMPLE.COM
Issued Expires Principal
May 2 20:43:12 May 3 04:43:12 krbtgt.EXAMPLE.COM@EXAMPLE.COMUsing Other CommandsIn an earlier example, we created a principal called
jane with an instance root.
This was based on a user with the same name as the principal, and this
is a Kerberos default; that a
<principal>.<instance> of the form
<username>.root will allow
that <username> to su to
root if the necessary entries are in the
.klogin file in root's
home directory:&prompt.root; cat /root/.klogin
jane.root@EXAMPLE.COMLikewise, if a user has in their own home directory lines of the
form:&prompt.user; cat ~/.klogin
jane@EXAMPLE.COM
jack@EXAMPLE.COMThis allows anyone in the EXAMPLE.COM realm
who has authenticated themselves to jane or
jack (via kinit, see above)
access to rlogin to jane's
account or files on this system (grunt) via
rlogin, rsh or
rcp.For example, jane now logs into another system using
Kerberos:&prompt.user; kinit
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Password:
&prompt.user; rlogin grunt
Last login: Mon May 1 21:14:47 from grumble
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
FreeBSD BUILT-19950429 (GR386) #0: Sat Apr 29 17:50:09 SAT 1995Or Jack logs into Jane's account on the same machine
(jane having
set up the .klogin file as above, and the person
in charge of Kerberos having set up principal
jack with a null instance:&prompt.user; kinit
&prompt.user; rlogin grunt -l jane
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Password:
Last login: Mon May 1 21:16:55 from grumble
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
FreeBSD BUILT-19950429 (GR386) #0: Sat Apr 29 17:50:09 SAT 1995GaryPalmerContributed by AlexNashFirewallsfirewallsecurityfirewallsFirewalls are an area of increasing interest for people who are
connected to the Internet, and are even finding applications on private
networks to provide enhanced security. This section will hopefully
explain what firewalls are, how to use them, and how to use the
facilities provided in the FreeBSD kernel to implement them.People often think that having a firewall between your
internal network and the Big Bad Internet will solve all
your security problems. It may help, but a poorly setup firewall
system is more of a security risk than not having one at all. A
firewall can add another layer of security to your systems, but it
cannot stop a really determined cracker from penetrating your internal
network. If you let internal security lapse because you believe your
firewall to be impenetrable, you have just made the crackers job that
much easier.What Is a Firewall?There are currently two distinct types of firewalls in common use
on the Internet today. The first type is more properly called a
packet filtering router, where the kernel on a
multi-homed machine chooses whether to forward or block packets based
on a set of rules. The second type, known as a proxy
server, relies on daemons to provide authentication and to
forward packets, possibly on a multi-homed machine which has kernel
packet forwarding disabled.Sometimes sites combine the two types of firewalls, so that only a
certain machine (known as a bastion host) is
allowed to send packets through a packet filtering router onto an
internal network. Proxy services are run on the bastion host, which
are generally more secure than normal authentication
mechanisms.FreeBSD comes with a kernel packet filter (known as
IPFW), which is what the rest of this
section will concentrate on. Proxy servers can be built on FreeBSD
from third party software, but there is such a variety of proxy
servers available that it would be impossible to cover them in this
section.Packet Filtering RoutersA router is a machine which forwards packets between two or more
networks. A packet filtering router has an extra piece of code in
its kernel which compares each packet to a list of rules before
deciding if it should be forwarded or not. Most modern IP routing
software has packet filtering code within it that defaults to
forwarding all packets. To enable the filters, you need to define a
set of rules for the filtering code so it can decide if the
packet should be allowed to pass or not.To decide whether a packet should be passed on, the code looks
through its set of rules for a rule which matches the contents of
this packets headers. Once a match is found, the rule action is
obeyed. The rule action could be to drop the packet, to forward the
packet, or even to send an ICMP message back to the originator.
Only the first match counts, as the rules are searched in order.
Hence, the list of rules can be referred to as a rule
chain.The packet matching criteria varies depending on the software
used, but typically you can specify rules which depend on the source
IP address of the packet, the destination IP address, the source
port number, the destination port number (for protocols which
support ports), or even the packet type (UDP, TCP, ICMP,
etc).Proxy ServersProxy servers are machines which have had the normal system
daemons (telnetd,
ftpd, etc) replaced with special servers.
These
servers are called proxy servers as they
normally only allow onward connections to be made. This enables you
to run (for example) a proxy telnet server on your firewall host,
and people can telnet in to your firewall from the outside, go
through some authentication mechanism, and then gain access to the
internal network (alternatively, proxy servers can be used for
signals coming from the internal network and heading out).Proxy servers are normally more secure than normal servers, and
often have a wider variety of authentication mechanisms available,
including one-shot password systems so that even if
someone manages to discover what password you used, they will not be
able to use it to gain access to your systems as the password
instantly expires. As they do not actually give users access to the
host machine, it becomes a lot more difficult for someone to install
backdoors around your security system.Proxy servers often have ways of restricting access further, so
that only certain hosts can gain access to the servers, and often
they can be set up so that you can limit which users can talk to
which destination machine. Again, what facilities are available
depends largely on what proxy software you choose.What Does IPFW Allow Me to Do?ipfwIPFW, the software supplied with
FreeBSD, is a packet filtering and accounting system which resides in
the kernel, and has a user-land control utility,
&man.ipfw.8;. Together, they allow you to define and query the
rules currently used by the kernel in its routing decisions.There are two related parts to IPFW.
The firewall section allows you to perform packet filtering. There is
also an IP accounting section which allows you to track usage of your
router, based on similar rules to the firewall section. This allows
you to see (for example) how much traffic your router is getting from
a certain machine, or how much WWW (World Wide Web) traffic it is
forwarding.As a result of the way that IPFW is
designed, you can use IPFW on non-router
machines to perform packet filtering on incoming and outgoing
connections. This is a special case of the more general use of
IPFW, and the same commands and techniques
should be used in this situation.Enabling IPFW on FreeBSDipfwenablingAs the main part of the IPFW system
lives in the kernel, you will need to add one or more options to your
kernel configuration file, depending on what facilities you want, and
recompile your kernel. See "Reconfiguring your Kernel" ()
for more details on how to recompile your
kernel.There are currently three kernel configuration options relevant to
IPFW:options IPFIREWALLCompiles into the kernel the code for packet
filtering.options IPFIREWALL_VERBOSEEnables code to allow logging of packets through
&man.syslogd.8;. Without this option, even if you specify
that packets should be logged in the filter rules, nothing will
happen.options IPFIREWALL_VERBOSE_LIMIT=10Limits the number of packets logged through
&man.syslogd.8; on a per entry basis. You may wish to use
this option in hostile environments in which you want to log
firewall activity, but do not want to be open to a denial of
service attack via syslog flooding.When a chain entry reaches the packet limit specified,
logging is turned off for that particular entry. To resume
logging, you will need to reset the associated counter using the
&man.ipfw.8; utility:&prompt.root; ipfw zero 4500Where 4500 is the chain entry you wish to continue
logging.Previous versions of FreeBSD contained an
IPFIREWALL_ACCT option. This is now obsolete as
the firewall code automatically includes accounting
facilities.Configuring IPFWipfwconfiguringThe configuration of the IPFW software
is done through the &man.ipfw.8; utility. The syntax for this
command looks quite complicated, but it is relatively simple once you
understand its structure.There are currently four different command categories used by the
utility: addition/deletion, listing, flushing, and clearing.
Addition/deletion is used to build the rules that control how packets
are accepted, rejected, and logged. Listing is used to examine the
contents of your rule set (otherwise known as the chain) and packet
counters (accounting). Flushing is used to remove all entries from
the chain. Clearing is used to zero out one or more accounting
entries.Altering the IPFW RulesThe syntax for this form of the command is:
ipfw-NcommandindexactionlogprotocoladdressesoptionsThere is one valid flag when using this form of the
command:-NResolve addresses and service names in output.The command given can be shortened to the
shortest unique form. The valid commands
are:addAdd an entry to the firewall/accounting rule listdeleteDelete an entry from the firewall/accounting rule
listPrevious versions of IPFW used
separate firewall and accounting entries. The present version
provides packet accounting with each firewall entry.If an index value is supplied, it is used to
place the entry at a specific point in the chain. Otherwise, the
entry is placed at the end of the chain at an index 100 greater than
the last chain entry (this does not include the default policy, rule
65535, deny).The log option causes matching rules to be
output to the system console if the kernel was compiled with
IPFIREWALL_VERBOSE.Valid actions are:rejectDrop the packet, and send an ICMP host or port unreachable
(as appropriate) packet to the source.allowPass the packet on as normal. (aliases:
pass and
accept)denyDrop the packet. The source is not notified via an
ICMP message (thus it appears that the packet never
arrived at the destination).countUpdate packet counters but do not allow/deny the packet
based on this rule. The search continues with the next chain
entry.Each action will be recognized by the
shortest unambiguous prefix.The protocols which can be specified
are:allMatches any IP packeticmpMatches ICMP packetstcpMatches TCP packetsudpMatches UDP packetsThe address specification is:fromaddress/maskporttoaddress/maskportvia interfaceYou can only specify port in
conjunction with protocols which support ports
(UDP and TCP).The is optional and may specify the IP
address or domain name of a local IP interface, or an interface name
(e.g. ed0) to match only packets coming
through this interface. Interface unit numbers can be specified
with an optional wildcard. For example, ppp*
would match all kernel PPP interfaces.The syntax used to specify an
address/mask is:
address
or
address/mask-bits
or
address:mask-patternA valid hostname may be specified in place of the IP address.
is a decimal
number representing how many bits in the address mask should be set.
e.g. specifying 192.216.222.1/24 will create a
mask which will allow any address in a class C subnet (in this case,
192.216.222) to be matched.
is an IP
address which will be logically AND'ed with the address given. The
keyword any may be used to specify any IP
address.The port numbers to be blocked are specified as:
port,port,port…
to specify either a single port or a list of ports, or
port-port
to specify a range of ports. You may also combine a single range
with a list, but the range must always be specified first.The options available are:fragMatches if the packet is not the first fragment of the
datagram.inMatches if the packet is on the way in.outMatches if the packet is on the way out.ipoptions specMatches if the IP header contains the comma separated list
of options specified in spec. The
supported list of IP options are: ssrr
(strict source route), lsrr (loose source
route), rr (record packet route), and
ts (time stamp). The absence of a
particular option may be denoted with a leading
!.establishedMatches if the packet is part of an already established
TCP connection (i.e. it has the RST or ACK bits set). You can
optimize the performance of the firewall by placing
established rules early in the
chain.setupMatches if the packet is an attempt to establish a TCP
connection (the SYN bit is set but the ACK bit is
not).tcpflags flagsMatches if the TCP header contains the comma separated
list of flags. The supported flags
are fin, syn,
rst, psh,
ack, and urg. The
absence of a particular flag may be indicated by a leading
!.icmptypes typesMatches if the ICMP type is present in the list
types. The list may be specified
as any combination of ranges and/or individual types separated
by commas. Commonly used ICMP types are: 0
echo reply (ping reply), 3 destination
unreachable, 5 redirect,
8 echo request (ping request), and
11 time exceeded (used to indicate TTL
expiration as with &man.traceroute.8;).Listing the IPFW RulesThe syntax for this form of the command is:
ipfw-a-t-NlThere are three valid flags when using this form of the
command:-aWhile listing, show counter values. This option is the
only way to see accounting counters.-tDisplay the last match times for each chain entry. The
time listing is incompatible with the input syntax used by the
&man.ipfw.8; utility.-NAttempt to resolve given addresses and service
names.Flushing the IPFW RulesThe syntax for flushing the chain is:
ipfwflushThis causes all entries in the firewall chain to be removed
except the fixed default policy enforced by the kernel (index
65535). Use caution when flushing rules, the default deny policy
will leave your system cut off from the network until allow entries
are added to the chain.Clearing the IPFW Packet CountersThe syntax for clearing one or more packet counters is:
ipfwzeroindexWhen used without an index argument,
all packet counters are cleared. If an
index is supplied, the clearing operation
only affects a specific chain entry.Example Commands for ipfwThis command will deny all packets from the host evil.crackers.org to the telnet port of the
host nice.people.org:&prompt.root; ipfw add deny tcp from evil.crackers.org to nice.people.org 23The next example denies and logs any TCP traffic from the entire
crackers.org network (a class C) to
the nice.people.org machine (any
port).&prompt.root; ipfw add deny log tcp from evil.crackers.org/24 to nice.people.orgIf you do not want people sending X sessions to your internal
network (a subnet of a class C), the following command will do the
necessary filtering:&prompt.root; ipfw add deny tcp from any to my.org/28 6000 setupTo see the accounting records:
&prompt.root; ipfw -a list
or in the short form
&prompt.root; ipfw -a lYou can also see the last time a chain entry was matched
with:&prompt.root; ipfw -at lBuilding a Packet Filtering FirewallThe following suggestions are just that: suggestions. The
requirements of each firewall are different and we cannot tell you
how to build a firewall to meet your particular requirements.When initially setting up your firewall, unless you have a test
bench setup where you can configure your firewall host in a controlled
environment, it is strongly recommend you use the logging version of the
commands and enable logging in the kernel. This will allow you to
quickly identify problem areas and cure them without too much
disruption. Even after the initial setup phase is complete, I
recommend using the logging for `deny' as it allows tracing of
possible attacks and also modification of the firewall rules if your
requirements alter.If you use the logging versions of the accept
command, it can generate large amounts of log
data as one log line will be generated for every packet that passes
through the firewall, so large FTP/http transfers, etc, will really
slow the system down. It also increases the latencies on those
packets as it requires more work to be done by the kernel before the
packet can be passed on. syslogd will
also start using up a lot
more processor time as it logs all the extra data to disk, and it
could quite easily fill the partition /var/log
is located on.You should enable your firewall from
/etc/rc.conf.local or
/etc/rc.conf. The associated manual page explains
which knobs to fiddle and lists some preset firewall configurations.
If you do not use a preset configuration, ipfw list
will output the current ruleset into a file that you can
pass to rc.conf. If you do not use
/etc/rc.conf.local or
/etc/rc.conf to enable your firewall,
it is important to make sure your firewall is enabled before
any IP interfaces are configured.The next problem is what your firewall should actually
do! This is largely dependent on what access to
your network you want to allow from the outside, and how much access
to the outside world you want to allow from the inside. Some general
rules are:Block all incoming access to ports below 1024 for TCP. This is
where most of the security sensitive services are, like finger,
SMTP (mail) and telnet.Block all incoming UDP traffic. There
are very few useful services that travel over UDP, and what useful
traffic there is, is normally a security threat (e.g. Suns RPC and
NFS protocols). This has its disadvantages also, since UDP is a
connectionless protocol, denying incoming UDP traffic also blocks
the replies to outgoing UDP traffic. This can cause a problem for
people (on the inside) using external archie (prospero) servers.
If you want to allow access to archie, you will have to allow
packets coming from ports 191 and 1525 to any internal UDP port
through the firewall. ntp is another
service you may consider allowing through, which comes from port
123.Block traffic to port 6000 from the outside. Port 6000 is the
port used for access to X11 servers, and can be a security threat
(especially if people are in the habit of doing xhost
+ on their workstations). X11 can actually use a
range of ports starting at 6000, the upper limit being how many X
displays you can run on the machine. The upper limit as defined
by RFC 1700 (Assigned Numbers) is 6063.Check what ports any internal servers use (e.g. SQL servers,
etc). It is probably a good idea to block those as well, as they
normally fall outside the 1-1024 range specified above.Another checklist for firewall configuration is available from
CERT at http://www.cert.org/tech_tips/packet_filtering.htmlAs stated above, these are only guidelines.
You will have to decide what filter rules you want to use on your
firewall yourself. We cannot accept ANY responsibility if someone
breaks into your network, even if you follow the advice given
above.IPFW Overhead and OptimizationMany people want to know how much overhead IPFW adds to a
system. The answer to this depends mostly on your rule set and
processor speed. For most applications dealing with Ethernet
and small rule sets, the answer is
negligible. For those of you that need actual
measurements to satisfy your curiosity, read on.The following measurements were made using 2.2.5-STABLE on
a 486-66. (While IPFW has changed slightly in later releases
of FreeBSD, it still performs with similar speed.) IPFW was
modified to measure the time spent within the
ip_fw_chk routine, displaying the results
to the console every 1000 packets.Two rule sets, each with 1000 rules were tested. The
first set was designed to demonstrate a worst case scenario by
repeating the rule:&prompt.root; ipfw add deny tcp from any to any 55555This demonstrates worst case by causing most of IPFW's
packet check routine to be executed before finally deciding
that the packet does not match the rule (by virtue of the port
number). Following the 999th iteration of this rule was an
allow ip from any to any.The second set of rules were designed to abort the rule
check quickly:&prompt.root; ipfw add deny ip from 1.2.3.4 to 1.2.3.4The non-matching source IP address for the above rule
causes these rules to be skipped very quickly. As before, the
1000th rule was an allow ip from any to
any.The per-packet processing overhead in the former case was
approximately 2.703ms/packet, or roughly 2.7 microseconds per
rule. Thus the theoretical packet processing limit with these
rules is around 370 packets per second. Assuming 10Mbps
Ethernet and a ~1500 byte packet size, we would only be able
to achieve a 55.5% bandwidth utilization.For the latter case each packet was processed in
approximately 1.172ms, or roughly 1.2 microseconds per rule.
The theoretical packet processing limit here would be about
853 packets per second, which could consume 10Mbps Ethernet
bandwidth.The excessive number of rules tested and the nature of
those rules do not provide a real-world scenario -- they were
used only to generate the timing information presented here.
Here are a few things to keep in mind when building an
efficient rule set:Place an established rule early on
to handle the majority of TCP traffic. Do not put any
allow tcp statements before this
rule.Place heavily triggered rules earlier in the rule set
than those rarely used (without changing the
permissiveness of the firewall, of course).
You can see which rules are used most often by examining
the packet counting statistics with ipfw -a
l.OpenSSLsecurityOpenSSLOpenSSLAs of FreeBSD 4.0, the OpenSSL toolkit is a part of the base
system. OpenSSL
provides a general-purpose cryptography library, as well as the
Secure Sockets Layer v2/v3 (SSLv2/SSLv3) and Transport Layer
Security v1 (TLSv1) network security protocols.However, one of the algorithms (specifically IDEA)
included in OpenSSL is protected by patents in the USA and
elsewhere, and is not available for unrestricted use.
IDEA is included in the OpenSSL sources in FreeBSD, but it is not
built by default. If you wish to use it, and you comply with the
license terms, enable the MAKE_IDEA switch in
/etc/make.conf and
rebuild your sources using make world.Today, the RSA algorithm is free for use in USA and other
countries. In the past it was protected by a patent.OpenSSLinstallSource Code InstallationsOpenSSL is part of the src-crypto and
src-secure cvsup collections. See the Obtaining FreeBSD section for more
information about obtaining and updating FreeBSD source
code.YoshinobuInoueContributed by IPsecIPsecsecurityIPsecTerminating CharactersThroughout examples in this section, and other sections,
you will notice that there is a ^D at the end
of some examples. This means to hold down the Control
key and hit the D key. Another commonly used
character is ^C, which respectively means to hold
down Control and press C.For other HOWTOs detailing IPSec implementation in
FreeBSD, take a look at
and .The IPsec mechanism provides secure communication for IP
layer and socket layer communication. This section should
explain how to use them. For implementation details, please
refer to The
Developers' Handbook.The current IPsec implementation supports both transport mode
and tunnel mode. However, tunnel mode comes with some restrictions.
http://www.kame.net/newsletter/
has more comprehensive examples.Please be aware that in order to use this functionality, you
must have the following options compiled into your kernel:options IPSEC #IP security
options IPSEC_ESP #IP security (crypto; define w/IPSEC)Transport Mode Example with IPv4Let us setup security association to deploy a secure channel
between HOST A (10.2.3.4) and HOST B (10.6.7.8). Here we show a little
complicated example. From HOST A to HOST B, only old AH is used.
From HOST B to HOST A, new AH and new ESP are combined.Now we should choose an algorithm to be used corresponding to
AH/new AH/ESP/
new ESP. Please refer to the &man.setkey.8; man
page to know algorithm names. Our choice is MD5 for AH, new-HMAC-SHA1
for new AH, and new-DES-expIV with 8 byte IV for new ESP.Key length highly depends on each algorithm. For example, key
length must be equal to 16 bytes for MD5, 20 for new-HMAC-SHA1,
and 8 for new-DES-expIV. Now we choose MYSECRETMYSECRET,
KAMEKAMEKAMEKAMEKAME, PASSWORD,
respectively.OK, let us assign SPI (Security Parameter Index) for each protocol.
Please note that we need 3 SPIs for this secure channel since three
security headers are produced (one for from HOST A to HOST B, two for
from HOST B to HOST A). Please also note that SPI MUST be greater
than or equal to 256. We choose, 1000, 2000, and 3000,
respectively.
(1)
HOST A ------> HOST B
(1)PROTO=AH
ALG=MD5(RFC1826)
KEY=MYSECRETMYSECRET
SPI=1000
(2.1)
HOST A <------ HOST B
<------
(2.2)
(2.1)
PROTO=AH
ALG=new-HMAC-SHA1(new AH)
KEY=KAMEKAMEKAMEKAMEKAME
SPI=2000
(2.2)
PROTO=ESP
ALG=new-DES-expIV(new ESP)
IV length = 8
KEY=PASSWORD
SPI=3000
Now, let us setup security association. Execute &man.setkey.8;
on both HOST A and B:
&prompt.root; setkey -c
add 10.2.3.4 10.6.7.8 ah-old 1000 -m transport -A keyed-md5 "MYSECRETMYSECRET" ;
add 10.6.7.8 10.2.3.4 ah 2000 -m transport -A hmac-sha1 "KAMEKAMEKAMEKAMEKAME" ;
add 10.6.7.8 10.2.3.4 esp 3000 -m transport -E des-cbc "PASSWORD" ;
^D
Actually, IPsec communication does not process until security policy
entries are defined. In this case, you must setup each host.
At A:
&prompt.root; setkey -c
spdadd 10.2.3.4 10.6.7.8 any -P out ipsec
ah/transport/10.2.3.4-10.6.7.8/require ;
^D
At B:
&prompt.root; setkey -c
spdadd 10.6.7.8 10.2.3.4 any -P out ipsec
esp/transport/10.6.7.8-10.2.3.4/require ;
spdadd 10.6.7.8 10.2.3.4 any -P out ipsec
ah/transport/10.6.7.8-10.2.3.4/require ;
^D
HOST A --------------------------------------> HOST E
10.2.3.4 10.6.7.8
| |
========== old AH keyed-md5 ==========>
<========= new AH hmac-sha1 ===========
<========= new ESP des-cbc ============
Transport Mode Example with IPv6Another example using IPv6.ESP transport mode is recommended for TCP port number 110 between
Host-A and Host-B.
============ ESP ============
| |
Host-A Host-B
fec0::10 -------------------- fec0::11
Encryption algorithm is blowfish-cbc whose key is
kamekame, and authentication algorithm is hmac-sha1
whose key is this is the test key.
Configuration at Host-A:
&prompt.root; setkey -c <<EOF
spdadd fec0::10[any] fec0::11[110] tcp -P out ipsec
esp/transport/fec0::10-fec0::11/use ;
spdadd fec0::11[110] fec0::10[any] tcp -P in ipsec
esp/transport/fec0::11-fec0::10/use ;
add fec0::10 fec0::11 esp 0x10001
-m transport
-E blowfish-cbc "kamekame"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
add fec0::11 fec0::10 esp 0x10002
-m transport
-E blowfish-cbc "kamekame"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
EOF
and at Host-B:&prompt.root; setkey -c <<EOF
spdadd fec0::11[110] fec0::10[any] tcp -P out ipsec
esp/transport/fec0::11-fec0::10/use ;
spdadd fec0::10[any] fec0::11[110] tcp -P in ipsec
esp/transport/fec0::10-fec0::11/use ;
add fec0::10 fec0::11 esp 0x10001 -m transport
-E blowfish-cbc "kamekame"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
add fec0::11 fec0::10 esp 0x10002 -m transport
-E blowfish-cbc "kamekame"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
EOF
Note the direction of SP.Tunnel Mode Example with IPv4Tunnel mode between two security gatewaysSecurity protocol is old AH tunnel mode, i.e. specified by
RFC1826, with keyed-md5 whose key is this is the test as
authentication algorithm.
======= AH =======
| |
Network-A Gateway-A Gateway-B Network-B
10.0.1.0/24 ---- 172.16.0.1 ----- 172.16.0.2 ---- 10.0.2.0/24
Configuration at Gateway-A:
&prompt.root; setkey -c <<EOF
spdadd 10.0.1.0/24 10.0.2.0/24 any -P out ipsec
ah/tunnel/172.16.0.1-172.16.0.2/require ;
spdadd 10.0.2.0/24 10.0.1.0/24 any -P in ipsec
ah/tunnel/172.16.0.2-172.16.0.1/require ;
add 172.16.0.1 172.16.0.2 ah-old 0x10003 -m any
-A keyed-md5 "this is the test" ;
add 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.1 ah-old 0x10004 -m any
-A keyed-md5 "this is the test" ;
EOF
If the port number field is omitted such as above then
[any] is employed. -m
specifies the mode of SA to be used. -m any means
wild-card of mode of security protocol. You can use this SA for both
tunnel and transport mode.and at Gateway-B:
&prompt.root; setkey -c <<EOF
spdadd 10.0.2.0/24 10.0.1.0/24 any -P out ipsec
ah/tunnel/172.16.0.2-172.16.0.1/require ;
spdadd 10.0.1.0/24 10.0.2.0/24 any -P in ipsec
ah/tunnel/172.16.0.1-172.16.0.2/require ;
add 172.16.0.1 172.16.0.2 ah-old 0x10003 -m any
-A keyed-md5 "this is the test" ;
add 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.1 ah-old 0x10004 -m any
-A keyed-md5 "this is the test" ;
EOF
Making SA bundle between two security gatewaysAH transport mode and ESP tunnel mode is required between
Gateway-A and Gateway-B. In this case, ESP tunnel mode is applied first,
and AH transport mode is next.
========== AH =========
| ======= ESP ===== |
| | | |
Network-A Gateway-A Gateway-B Network-B
fec0:0:0:1::/64 --- fec0:0:0:1::1 ---- fec0:0:0:2::1 --- fec0:0:0:2::/64
Tunnel Mode Example with IPv6Encryption algorithm is 3des-cbc, and authentication algorithm
for ESP is hmac-sha1. Authentication algorithm for AH is hmac-md5.
Configuration at Gateway-A:
&prompt.root; setkey -c <<EOF
spdadd fec0:0:0:1::/64 fec0:0:0:2::/64 any -P out ipsec
esp/tunnel/fec0:0:0:1::1-fec0:0:0:2::1/require
ah/transport/fec0:0:0:1::1-fec0:0:0:2::1/require ;
spdadd fec0:0:0:2::/64 fec0:0:0:1::/64 any -P in ipsec
esp/tunnel/fec0:0:0:2::1-fec0:0:0:1::1/require
ah/transport/fec0:0:0:2::1-fec0:0:0:1::1/require ;
add fec0:0:0:1::1 fec0:0:0:2::1 esp 0x10001 -m tunnel
-E 3des-cbc "kamekame12341234kame1234"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
add fec0:0:0:1::1 fec0:0:0:2::1 ah 0x10001 -m transport
-A hmac-md5 "this is the test" ;
add fec0:0:0:2::1 fec0:0:0:1::1 esp 0x10001 -m tunnel
-E 3des-cbc "kamekame12341234kame1234"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
add fec0:0:0:2::1 fec0:0:0:1::1 ah 0x10001 -m transport
-A hmac-md5 "this is the test" ;
EOF
Making SAs with the different endESP tunnel mode is required between Host-A and Gateway-A. Encryption
algorithm is cast128-cbc, and authentication algorithm for ESP is
hmac-sha1. ESP transport mode is recommended between Host-A and Host-B.
Encryption algorithm is rc5-cbc, and authentication algorithm for ESP is
hmac-md5.
================== ESP =================
| ======= ESP ======= |
| | | |
Host-A Gateway-A Host-B
fec0:0:0:1::1 ---- fec0:0:0:2::1 ---- fec0:0:0:2::2
Configuration at Host-A:
&prompt.root; setkey -c <<EOF
spdadd fec0:0:0:1::1[any] fec0:0:0:2::2[80] tcp -P out ipsec
esp/transport/fec0:0:0:1::1-fec0:0:0:2::2/use
esp/tunnel/fec0:0:0:1::1-fec0:0:0:2::1/require ;
spdadd fec0:0:0:2::1[80] fec0:0:0:1::1[any] tcp -P in ipsec
esp/transport/fec0:0:0:2::2-fec0:0:0:l::1/use
esp/tunnel/fec0:0:0:2::1-fec0:0:0:1::1/require ;
add fec0:0:0:1::1 fec0:0:0:2::2 esp 0x10001
-m transport
-E cast128-cbc "12341234"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
add fec0:0:0:1::1 fec0:0:0:2::1 esp 0x10002
-E rc5-cbc "kamekame"
-A hmac-md5 "this is the test" ;
add fec0:0:0:2::2 fec0:0:0:1::1 esp 0x10003
-m transport
-E cast128-cbc "12341234"
-A hmac-sha1 "this is the test key" ;
add fec0:0:0:2::1 fec0:0:0:1::1 esp 0x10004
-E rc5-cbc "kamekame"
-A hmac-md5 "this is the test" ;
EOF
ChernLeeContributed by OpenSSHOpenSSHsecurityOpenSSHSecure shell is a set of network connectivity tools used to
access remote machines securely. It can be used as a direct
replacement for rlogin,
rsh, rcp, and
telnet. Additionally, any other TCP/IP
connections can be tunneled/forwarded securely through ssh.
ssh encrypts all traffic to effectively eliminate eavesdropping,
connection hijacking, and other network-level attacks.OpenSSH is maintained by the OpenBSD project, and is based
upon SSH v1.2.12 with all the recent bug fixes and updates. It
is compatible with both SSH protocols 1 and 2. OpenSSH has been
in the base system since FreeBSD 4.0.Advantages of Using OpenSSHNormally, when using &man.telnet.1; or &man.rlogin.1;,
data is sent over the network in an clear, un-encrypted form.
Network sniffers anywhere in between the client and server can
steal your user/password information or data transferred in
your session. OpenSSH offers a variety of authentication and
encryption methods to prevent this from happening.Enabling sshdOpenSSHenablingBe sure to make the following additions to your
rc.conf file:sshd_enable="YES"This will load the ssh daemon
the next time your system initializes. Alternatively, you can
simply run the sshd daemon.SSH ClientOpenSSHclientThe &man.ssh.1; utility works similarly to
&man.rlogin.1;.&prompt.root; ssh user@example.com
Host key not found from the list of known hosts.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Host 'example.com' added to the list of known hosts.
user@example.com's password: *******The login will continue just as it would have if a session was
created using rlogin or
telnet. SSH utilizes a key fingerprint
system for verifying the authenticity of the server when the
client connects. The user is prompted to enter
yes only when
connecting for the first time. Future attempts to login are all
verified against the saved fingerprint key. The SSH client
will alert you if the saved fingerprint differs from the
received fingerprint on future login attempts. The fingerprints
are saved in ~/.ssh/known_hosts, or
~/.ssh/known_hosts2 for SSH v2
fingerprints.By default, OpenSSH servers are configured to accept both
SSH v1 and SSH v2 connections. The client, however, can choose
between the two. Version 2 is known to be more robust and
secure than its predecessor.ssh can be forced to use either protocol
by passing it the or argument
for v1 and v2, respectively.Secure CopyOpenSSHsecure copyscpThe scp command works similarly to
rcp; it copies a file to or from a remote machine,
except in a secure fashion.&prompt.root; scp user@example.com:/COPYRIGHT COPYRIGHT
user@example.com's password:
COPYRIGHT 100% |*****************************| 4735
00:00
&prompt.root;Since the fingerprint was already saved for this host in the
previous example, it is verified when using scp
here.The arguments passed to scp are similar
to cp, with the file or files in the first
argument, and the destination in the second. Since the file is
fetched over the network, through SSH, one or more of the file
arguments takes on the form
.ConfigurationOpenSSHconfigurationThe system-wide configuration files for both the OpenSSH
daemon and client reside within the /etc/ssh
directory.ssh_config configures the client
settings, while sshd_config configures the
daemon.Additionally, the
(/usr/sbin/sshd by default), and
rc.conf
options can provide more levels of configuration.ssh-keygenInstead of using passwords, &man.ssh-keygen.1; can
be used to generate RSA keys to authenticate a user.&prompt.user; ssh-keygen
Initializing random number generator...
Generating p: .++ (distance 66)
Generating q: ..............................++ (distance 498)
Computing the keys...
Key generation complete.
Enter file in which to save the key (/home/user/.ssh/identity):
Enter passphrase:
Enter the same passphrase again:
Your identification has been saved in /home/user/.ssh/identity.
...&man.ssh-keygen.1; will create a public and private
key pair for use in authentication. The private key is stored in
~/.ssh/identity, whereas the public key is
stored in ~/.ssh/identity.pub. The public
key must be placed in ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
of the remote machine in order for the setup to work.This will allow connection to the remote machine based upon
RSA authentication instead of passwords.If a passphrase is used in &man.ssh-keygen.1;, the user
will be prompted for a password each time in order to use the private
key.A SSH v2 DSA key can be created for the same purpose by using
the ssh-keygen -d command (or
ssh-keygen -t dsa for FreeBSD &os.current;).
This will
create a public/private DSA key for use in SSH v2 sessions only.
The public key is stored in ~/.ssh/id_dsa.pub,
while the private key is in ~/.ssh/id_dsa.DSA public keys are placed in
~/.ssh/authorized_keys2 on the remote
machine.&man.ssh-agent.1; and &man.ssh-add.1; are
utilities used in managing multiple passworded private keys.SSH TunnelingOpenSSHtunnelingOpenSSH has the ability to create a tunnel to encapsulate
another protocol in an encrypted session.The following command tells &man.ssh.1; to create a tunnel
for telnet.&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 5023:localhost:23 user@foo.example.com
&prompt.user;The ssh command is used with the
following options:Forces ssh to use version 2 of
the protocol. (Do not use if you are working with older
ssh servers)Indicates no command, or tunnel only. If omitted,
ssh would initiate a normal
session.Forces ssh to run in the
background.Indicates a local tunnel in
localport:remotehost:remoteport
fashion.The remote SSH server.An SSH tunnel works by creating a listen socket on
localhost on the specified port.
It then forwards any connection received
on the local host/port via the SSH connection to the specified
remote host and port.In the example, port 5023 on
localhost is being forwarded to port
23 on localhost
of the remote machine. Since 23 is telnet,
this would create a secure telnet session through an SSH tunnel.This can be used to wrap any number of insecure TCP protocols
such as SMTP, POP3, FTP, etc.Using SSH to create a secure tunnel for SMTP&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 5025:localhost:25 user@mailserver.example.com
user@mailserver.example.com's password: *****
&prompt.user; telnet localhost 5025
Trying 127.0.0.1...
Connected to localhost.
Escape character is '^]'.
220 mailserver.example.com ESMTPThis can be used in conjunction with an
&man.ssh-keygen.1; and additional user accounts to create a
more seamless/hassle-free SSH tunneling environment. Keys
can be used in place of typing a password, and the tunnels
can be run as a separate user.Practical SSH Tunneling ExamplesSecure Access of a POP3 serverAt work, there is an SSH server that accepts
connections from the outside. On the same office network
resides a mail server running a POP3 server. The network,
or network path between your home and office may or may not
be completely trustable. Because of this, you need to check
your e-mail in a secure manner. The solution is to create
an SSH connection to your office's SSH server, and tunnel
through to the mail server.&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 2110:mail.example.com:110 user@ssh-server.example.com
user@ssh-server.example.com's password: ******When the tunnel is up and running, you can point your
mail client to send POP3 requests to localhost
port 2110. A connection here will be forwarded securely across
the tunnel to mail.example.com.Bypassing a Draconian FirewallSome network administrators impose extremely Draconian
firewall rules, filtering not only incoming connections,
but outgoing connections. You may be only given access
to contact remote machines on ports 22 and 80 for SSH
and web surfing.You may wish to access another (perhaps non-work
related) service, such as an Ogg Vorbis server to stream
music. If this Ogg Vorbis server is streaming on some other
port than 22 or 80, you will not be able to access it.The solution is to create an SSH connection to a machine
outside of your network's firewall, and use it to tunnel to
the Ogg Vorbis server.&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 8888:music.example.com:8000 user@unfirewalled.myserver.com
user@unfirewalled.myserver.com's password: *******Your streaming client can now be pointed to
localhost port 8888, which will be
forwarded over to music.example.com port
8000, successfully evading the firewall.Further ReadingOpenSSH&man.ssh.1; &man.scp.1; &man.ssh-keygen.1;
&man.ssh-agent.1; &man.ssh-add.1;&man.sshd.8; &man.sftp-server.8;
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/x11/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/x11/chapter.sgml
index c641c272ef..b2364b4970 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/x11/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/x11/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,1436 +1,1436 @@
The X Window SystemSynopsisFreeBSD uses XFree86 to provide users with a powerful
graphical user interface. XFree86 is an open-source
implementation of the X Window System. This chapter
will cover installation and configuration of XFree86 on a
FreeBSD system. For more information on XFree86 and
video hardware that it supports, check the XFree86 web site.After reading this chapter, you will know:The various components of the X window system, and how they
interoperate.How to install and configure XFree86.How to install and use different window managers.How to use TrueType fonts in XFree86.How to setup your system for graphical logins (XDM).Before reading this chapter, you should:Know how to install additional third-party
software ().Understanding XUsing X for the first time can be somewhat of a shock to someone
familiar with other graphical environments, such as Microsoft Windows or
MacOS.It is not necessary to understand all of the details of various
X components and how they interact; however, some basic knowledge makes
it possible to take advantage of X's strengths.Why X?X is not the first window system written for Unix, but it is the
most popular. X's original development team had worked on another
window system before writing X. That system's name was
W (for Window). X is just the next
letter in the Roman alphabet.X can be called X, X Window System,
X11, and other terms. Calling X11
X Windows can offend some people;
see &man.X.1; for a bit more insight on this.The X Client/Server ModelX was designed from the beginning to be network-centric, and
adopts a client-server model. In the X model, the
X server runs on the computer that has the keyboard,
monitor, and mouse attached. The server is responsible for managing
the display, handling input from the keyboard and mouse, and so on.
Each X application (such as XTerm, or
Netscape) is a client. A
client sends messages to the server such as Please draw a
window at these coordinates, and the server sends back
messages such as The user just clicked on the OK
button.If there is only one computer involved, such as in a home or small
office environment, the X server and the X clients will be running on
the same computer. However, it is perfectly possible to run the X
server on a less powerful desktop computer, and run X applications
(the clients) on, say, the powerful and expensive machine that serves
the office. In this scenario the communication between the X client
and server takes place over the network.This confuses some people, because the X terminology is
exactly backward to what they expect. They expect the X
server to be the big powerful machine down the hall, and
the X client to be the machine on their desk.Remember that the X server is the machine with the monitor and
keyboard, and the X clients are the programs that display the
windows.There is nothing in the protocol that forces the client and
server machines to be running the same operating system, or even to
be running on the same type of computer. It is certainly possible to
run an X server on Microsoft Windows or Apple's MacOS, and there are
various free and commercial applications available that do exactly
that.The X server that ships with FreeBSD is called
XFree86, and is available for free, under a
license very similar to the FreeBSD license. Commercial X servers for
FreeBSD are also available.The Window ManagerThe X design philosophy is much like the Unix design philosophy,
tools, not policy. This means that X does not try to
dictate how a task is to be accomplished. Instead, tools are provided
to the user, and it is the user's responsibility to decide how to use
those tools.This philosophy extends to X not dictating what windows should
look like on screen, how to move them around with the mouse, what
keystrokes should be used to move between windows (i.e.,
AltTab, in the case of Microsoft Windows), what the title bars
on each window should look like, whether or not they have close
buttons on them, and so on.Instead, X delegates this responsibility to an application called
a Window Manager. There are dozens of window
managers available for X; AfterStep,
Blackbox, ctwm,
Enlightenment,
fvwm, Sawfish,
twm,
Window Maker, and more. Each of these
window managers provides a different look and feel; some of them
support virtual desktops; some of them allow customized
keystrokes to manage the desktop; some have a Start
button or similar device; some are themeable, allowing
a complete change of look-and-feel by applying a new theme. These
window managers, and many more, are available in the
x11-wm category of the Ports Collection.In addition, the KDE and GNOME desktop environments both have
their own window managers which integrate with the desktop.Each window manager also has a different configuration mechanism;
some expect configuration file written by hand, others feature
GUI tools for most of the configuration tasks; at least one
(sawfish) has a configuration file written
in a dialect of the Lisp language.Focus PolicyAnother feature the window manager is responsible for is the
mouse focus policy. Every windowing system
needs some means of choosing a window to be actively receiving
keystrokes, and should visibly indicate which window is active as
well.A familiar focus policy is called click-to-focus.
This is the model utilized by Microsoft Windows, in which a window
becomes active upon receiving a mouse click.
X does not support any particular focus policy. Instead, the
window manager controls which window has the focus at any one time.
Different window managers will support different focus methods. All
of them support click to focus, and the majority of them support
several others.The most popular focus policies are:focus-follows-mouseThe window that is under the mouse pointer is the
window that has the focus. This may not necessarily be
the window that is on top of all the other windows.
The focus is changed by pointing at another window, there
is no need to click in it as well.sloppy-focusThis policy is a small extension to focus-follows-mouse.
With focus-follows-mouse, if the mouse is moved over the
root window (or background) then no window has the focus,
and keystrokes are simply lost. With sloppy-focus, focus is
only changed when the cursor enters a new window, and not
when exiting the current window.click-to-focusThe active window is selected by mouse click. The
window may then be raised, and appear in
front of all other windows. All keystrokes will now be
directed to this window, even if the cursor is moved to
another window.Many window managers support other policies, as well as
variations on these. Be sure to consult the documentation for
the window manager itself.WidgetsThe X approach of providing tools and not policy extends to the
widgets that seen on screen in each application.Widget is a term for all the items in the user
interface that can be clicked or manipulated in some way; buttons,
check boxes, radio buttons, icons, lists, and so on. Microsoft
Windows calls these controls.Microsoft Windows and Apple's MacOS both have a very rigid widget
policy. Application developers are supposed to ensure that their
applications share a common look and feel. With X, it was not
considered sensible to mandate a particular graphical style, or set
of widgets to adhere to.As a result, do not expect X applications to have a common
look and feel. There are several popular widget sets and
variations, including the original Athena widget set from MIT,
Motif (on which the widget set in
Microsoft Windows was modeled, all bevelled edges and three shades of
grey), OpenLook, and others.Most newer X applications today will use a modern-looking widget
set, either Qt, used by KDE, or
GTK, used by the
GNOME
project. In this respect, there is some convergence in
look-and-feel of the Unix desktop, which certainly makes things
easier for the novice user.Installing XFree86Before installing XFree86, decide on which version to
run. XFree86 3.X is a maintenance
branch of XFree86 development. It is very stable, and it
supports a huge number of graphics cards. However, no new
development is being done on the software. XFree86
4.X is a complete redesign of the system with many
new features such as better support for fonts and
anti-aliasing. Unfortunately this new architecture requires
that the video drivers be rewritten, and some of the older
cards that were supported in 3.X are not yet supported in 4.X.The FreeBSD setup program offers users the opportunity to install
and configure XFree86 3.3.6 during installation (covered in
). To run
XFree86 4.X, wait until after the base
FreeBSD system is installed, and then install XFree86. For example,
to build and install XFree86 4.X from the
ports collection:&prompt.root; cd /usr/ports/x11/XFree86-4
&prompt.root; make all install cleanAlternatively, XFree86 4.X can be
installed from a binary package with the
pkg_add tool or directly from the FreeBSD
binaries provided on the XFree86 web site.The rest of this chapter will explain how to configure
XFree86, and how to setup a productive desktop environment.ChristopherShumwayContributed by XFree86 ConfigurationXFree86 4.XXFree86Before StartingBefore configuration of XFree86 4.X,
the following information about the target system is needed:Monitor specificationsVideo Adapter chipsetVideo Adapter memoryhorizontal scan ratevertical scan rateThe specifications for the monitor are used by
XFree86 to determine the resolution and
refresh rate to run at. These specifications can usually be
obtained from the documentation that came with the monitor or from
the manufacturer's website. There are two ranges of numbers that
are needed, the horizontal scan rate and the vertical synchronization
rate.The video adapter's chipset defines what driver module
XFree86 uses to talk to the graphics
hardware. With most chipsets, this can be automatically
determined, but it is still useful to know in case the automatic
detection does not work correctly.Video memory on the graphic adapter determines the
resolution and color depth which the system can run at. This is
important to know so the user knows the limitations of the
system.Configuring XFree86 4.XConfiguration of XFree86 4.X is
a multi-step process. The first step is to build an initial
configuration file with the option to
XFree86. As the super user, simply
run:&prompt.root; XFree86 -configureThis will generate a skeleton
XFree86 configuration file in the
current working directory called
XF86Config.new. The
XFree86 program will attempt to probe
the graphics hardware on the system and will write a
configuration file to load the proper drivers for the detected
hardware on the target system.The next step is to test the existing
configuration to verify that XFree86
can work with the graphics
hardware on the target system. To perform this task, the user
needs to run:&prompt.root; XFree86 -xf86config XF86Config.newIf a black and grey grid and an X mouse cursor appear,
the configuration was successful. To exit the test, just press
CtrlAltBackspace simultaneously.XFree86 4 TuningNext, tune the XF86Config.new
configuration file to taste. Open the file in a text editor such
as &man.emacs.1; or &man.ee.1;. First, add the
frequencies for the target system's monitor. These are usually
expressed as a horizontal and vertical synchronization rate. These
values are added to the XF86Config.new file
under the "Monitor" section:Section "Monitor"
Identifier "Monitor0"
VendorName "Monitor Vendor"
ModelName "Monitor Model"
HorizSync 30-107
VertRefresh 48-120
EndSectionThe HorizSync and
VertRefresh keywords may not exist in the
configuration file. If they do not, they need to be added, with
the correct horizontal synchronization rate placed after the
Horizsync keyword and the vertical
synchronization rate after the VertRefresh
keyword. In the example above the target monitor's rates were
entered.X allows DPMS (Energy Star) features to be used with capable
monitors. The 'xset' program controls the time-outs and can force
standby, suspend, or off modes. If you wish to enable DPMS features
for your monitor, you must add the following line to the monitor
section.
Option "DPMS"XF86ConfigWhile the XF86Config.new
configuration file is still open in an editor, select
the default resolution and color depth desired. This is
defined in the Screen section:Section "Screen"
Identifier "Screen0"
Device "Card0"
Monitor "Monitor0"
DefaultDepth 24
SubSection "Display"
Depth 24
Modes "1024x768"
EndSubSection
EndSectionThe DefaultDepth keyword describes
the color depth to run at by default. This can be overridden
with the -bpp command line switch to
&man.XFree86.1;
The Modes keyword
describes the resolution to run at for the given color depth.
In the example above, the default color depth is twenty-four
bits per pixel. At this color depth, the accepted resolution is
one thousand twenty-four pixels by seven hundred and sixty-eight
pixels.To run at a resolution of one thousand twenty-four pixels by
seven hundred sixty-eight pixels at twenty-four bits per pixel,
add the DefaultDepth keyword with the
value of twenty-four, and add to the "Display"
subsection with the desired Depth the Modes keyword with the
resolution the user wishes to run at. Note that only VESA
standard modes are supported as defined by the target system's
graphics hardware.Finally, write the configuration file and test it using
the test mode given above. If all is well, the configuration
file needs to be installed in a common location where
&man.XFree86.1;
can find it.
This is typically /etc/X11/XF86Config or
/usr/X11R6/etc/X11/XF86Config.&prompt.root; cp XF86Config.new /etc/X11/XF86ConfigOnce the configuration file has been placed in a common
location, configuration is complete. In order to start
XFree86 4.X with &man.startx.1;,
install the x11/wrapper port.
XFree86 4.X can also be started with
&man.xdm.1;.Advanced Configuration TopicsConfiguration with Intel i810 Graphics ChipsetsIntel i810 graphic chipsetConfiguration with Intel i810 integrated chipsets
requires the agpgart
AGP programming interface for XFree86
to drive the card. To use agpgart,
the agp.ko kernel loadable module needs to
be loaded into the kernel with &man.kldload.8;. This can be
done automatically with the &man.loader.8; at boot time.
Simply add this line to
/boot/loader.conf:agp_load="YES"Next, a device node needs to be created for the
programming interface. To create the AGP device node, run
&man.MAKEDEV.8; in the /dev
directory:&prompt.root; cd /dev
&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV agpgartThis will allow configuration of the hardware as any other
graphics board.If you are using XFree86 4.1.0 (or later) and messages
about unresolved symbols like
fbPictureInit appear, try adding the
following line after Driver "i810" in the
XFree86 config file:Option "NoDDC"MurrayStokelyContributed by Using Fonts in XFree86Type1 FontsThe default fonts that ship with
XFree86 are less than ideal for typical
desktop publishing applications. Large presentation fonts show up
jagged and unprofessional looking, and small fonts in Netscape are
almost completely unintelligible. However, there are several
free, high quality Type1 (PostScript) fonts available which
can be readily used
with XFree86, either version 3.X or
version 4.X. For instance, the URW font collection
(x11-fonts/urwfonts) includes
high quality versions of standard type1 fonts (Times Roman,
Helvetica, Palatino and others). The Freefont collection
(x11-fonts/freefont) includes
many more fonts, but most of them are intended for use in
graphics software such as the Gimp, and are not complete
enough to serve as screen fonts. In addition,
XFree86 can be configured to use
TrueType fonts with a minimum of effort: see the
section on TrueType fonts later.To install the above Type1 font collections from the ports
collection, run the following commands:&prompt.root; cd /usr/ports/x11-fonts/urwfonts
&prompt.root; make install cleanAnd likewise with the freefont or other collections. To tell the X server
that these fonts exist, add an appropriate line to the
XF86Config file (in
/etc/ for XFree86
version 3, or in /etc/X11/ for version 4),
which reads:FontPath "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/URW/"Alternatively, at the command line in the X session
run:&prompt.user; xset fp+ /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/URW
&prompt.user; xset fp rehashThis will work but will be lost when the X session is closed,
unless it is added to the startup file (~/.xinitrc
for a normal startx session,
or ~/.xsession when logging in through a
graphical login manager like XDM).
A third way is to use the new
XftConfig file: see the
section on anti-aliasing.
TrueType FontsXFree86 4.X has built in support
for rendering TrueType fonts. There are two different modules
that can enable this functionality. The "freetype" module is used
in this example because it is more consistent with the other font
rendering back-ends. To enable the freetype module just add the
following line to the module section of the
/etc/X11/XF86Config file.Load "freetype"For XFree86 3.3.X, a separate
TrueType font server is needed.
Xfstt is commonly used for
this purpose. To install Xfstt,
simply install the port x11-servers/Xfstt.Now make a directory for the TrueType fonts (for example,
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/TrueType)
and copy all of the TrueType fonts into this directory. Keep in
mind that TrueType fonts cannot be directly taken from a
Macintosh; they must be in Unix/DOS/Windows format for use by
XFree86. Once the files have been
copied into this directory, use
ttmkfdir to create a
fonts.dir file, so that the X font renderer
knows that these new files have been installed.
ttmkfdir is available from the FreeBSD
Ports Collection as x11-fonts/ttmkfdir.&prompt.root; cd /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/TrueType
&prompt.root; ttmkfdir > fonts.dirNow add the TrueType directory to the font
path. This is just the same as described above for Type1 fonts, that is, use
&prompt.user; xset fp+ /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/TrueType
&prompt.user; xset fp rehash
or add a line to the
XF86Config file.That's it. Now Netscape,
Gimp,
StarOffice, and all of the other X
applications should now recognize the installed TrueType
fonts. Extremely small fonts (as with text in a high resolution
display on a web page) and extremely large fonts (within
StarOffice) will look much better
now.Anti-Aliased FontsStarting with version 4.0.2, XFree86
supports anti-aliased
fonts. Currently, most software has not been updated to take
advantage of this new functionality. However, Qt (the toolkit
for the KDE desktop) does; so if
XFree86 4.0.2 is used
(or higher), Qt 2.3 (or higher) and KDE,
all KDE/Qt applications can be made to use anti-aliased
fonts.To configure anti-aliasing, create (or edit, if
it already exists) the file
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/XftConfig. Several
advanced things can be done with this file; this section
describes only the simplest possibilities.First, tell the X server about the fonts that are to be
anti-aliased. For each font directory, add a line similar
to this:dir "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/Type1"Likewise for the other font directories (URW, truetype, etc)
containing fonts to be anti-aliased. Anti-aliasing makes
sense only for scalable fonts (basically, Type1 and TrueType) so
do not include bitmap font directories here. The
directories included here can now be commented out
of the XF86Config file.Antialiasing makes borders slightly fuzzy, which makes very
small text more readable and removes staircases from
large text, but can cause eyestrain if applied to normal text. To
exclude point sizes between 9 and 13 from anti-aliasing, include
these lines:match
any size > 8
any size < 14
edit
antialias = false;Spacing for some monospaced fonts may also be inappropriate
with anti-aliasing. This seems to be an issue with
KDE, in particular. One possible fix for
this is to force the spacing for such fonts to be 100. Add the
following lines:match any family == "fixed" edit family =+ "mono";
match any family == "console" edit family =+ "mono";(this aliases the other common names for fixed fonts as "mono"),
and then add:match any family == "mono" edit spacing = 100;Supposing the
Lucidux fonts as desired whenever
monospaced fonts are required (these look nice, and do not seem
to suffer from the spacing problem), replace that last
line with these:match any family == "mono" edit family += "LuciduxMono";
match any family == "Lucidux Mono" edit family += "LuciduxMono";
match any family == "LuciduxMono" edit family =+ "Lucidux Mono";(the last lines alias different equivalent family names).Finally, it is nice to allow users to add commands to this
file, via their personal .xftconfig
files. To do this, add a last line:includeif "~/.xftconfig"One last point: with an LCD screen, sub-pixel sampling may be
desired. This basically treats the (horizontally separated)
red, green and blue components separately to improve the horizontal
resolution; the results can be dramatic. To enable this, add the
line somewhere in the XftConfig filematch edit rgba=rgb;(depending on the sort of display, the last word may need to
- be changed from from ``rgb'' to ``bgr'', ``vrgb''
+ be changed from ``rgb'' to ``bgr'', ``vrgb''
or ``vbgr'': experiment and see which works best.)Anti-aliasing should be enabled the next time the X server is
started. However, note that programs must know how to take
advantage of it. At the present time, the toolkit
Qt does, so the entire KDE environment
can use anti-aliased fonts
(see on
KDE for
details); there are patches for gtk+ to do the same,
so if compiled against such a patched gtk+, the GNOME environment
and Mozilla can also use anti-aliased fonts. In fact, there
is now a port called x11/gdkxft which allows one
to use antialiased fonts without recompiling: see
for details.Anti-aliasing is still new to FreeBSD and
XFree86;
configuring it should get easier with time, and it will soon be
supported by many more applications.SethKingsleyContributed by The X Display ManagerOverviewThe X Display Manager (XDM) is
an optional part of the X Window System that is used for login
session management. This is useful for several types of
situations, including minimal X Terminals,
desktops, and large network display
servers. Since the X Window System is network and protocol
independent, there are a wide variety of possible configurations
for running X clients and servers on different machines
connected by a network. XDM provides
a graphical interface for choosing which display server to
connect to, and entering authorization information such as a
login and password combination.Think of XDM as
providing the same functionality to the user as the
&man.getty.8; utility (see for
details). That is, it performs system logins to the display
being connected to and then runs a session manager on behalf of
the user (usually an X window
manager). XDM then waits for this
program to exit, signaling that the user is done and should be
logged out of the display. At this point,
XDM can display the login and display
chooser screens for the next user to login.Using XDMThe XDM daemon program is
located in /usr/X11R6/bin/xdm. This program
can be run at any time as root and it will
start managing the X display on the local machine. If
XDM is to be run every
time the machine boots up, a convenient way to do this is by
adding an entry to /etc/ttys. For more
information about the format and usage of this file, see . There is a line in the default
/etc/ttys file for running the
XDM daemon on a virtual terminal:
ttyv8 "/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon" xterm off secure
By default this entry is disabled; in order to enable it
change field 5 from off to
on and restart &man.init.8; using the
directions in . The first field, the
name of the terminal this program will manage, is
ttyv8. This means that
XDM will start running on the 9th
virtual terminal.Configuring XDMThe XDM configuration directory
is located in /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xdm. In
this directory there are several files used to change the
behavior and appearance of
XDM. Typically these files will
be found:FileDescriptionXaccessClient authorization ruleset.XresourcesDefault X resource values.XserversList of remote and local displays to manage.XsessionDefault session script for logins.Xsetup_*Script to launch applications before the login
interface.xdm-configGlobal configuration for all displays running on
this machine.xdm-errorsErrors generated by the server program.xdm-pidThe process ID of the currently running XDM.Also in this directory are a few scripts and programs used
to setup the desktop when XDM is
running. The purpose of each of these files will be briefly
described. The exact syntax and usage of all of these files is
described in &man.xdm.1;The default configuration is a simple rectangular login
window with the hostname of the machine displayed at the top in
a large font and Login: and
Password: prompts below. This is a good starting
point for changing the look and feel of
XDM screens.XaccessThe protocol for connecting to
XDM controlled displays is called
the X Display Manager Connection Protocol (XDMCP). This file
is a ruleset for controlling XDMCP connections from remote
machines. By default, it allows any client to connect, but
that does not matter unless the xdm-config
is changed to listen for remote connections.XresourcesThis is an application-defaults file for the display
chooser and the login screens. This is where the appearance
of the login program can be modified. The format is identical
to the app-defaults file described in the
XFree86 documentation.XserversThis is a list of the remote displays the chooser should
provide as choices.XsessionThis is the default session script for
XDM to run after a user has logged
in. Normally each user will have a customized session script
in ~/.xsessionrc that overrides this
script.Xsetup_*These will be run automatically before displaying the
chooser or login interfaces. There is a script for each
display being used, named Xsetup_ followed
by the local display number (for instance
Xsetup_0). Typically these scripts will
run one or two programs in the background such as
xconsole.xdm-configThis contains settings in the form of app-defaults
that are applicable to every display that this installation
manages.xdm-errorsThis contains the output of the X servers that
XDM is trying to run. If a display
that XDM is trying to start hangs
for some reason, this is a good place to look for error
messages. These messages are also written to the user's
~/.xsession-errors file on a per-session
basis.Running a Network Display ServerIn order for other clients to connect to the display
server, edit the access control rules, and enable the connection
listener. By default these are set to conservative values.
To make XDM listen for connections,
first comment out a line in the xdm-config
file:
! SECURITY: do not listen for XDMCP or Chooser requests
! Comment out this line if you want to manage X terminals with xdm
DisplayManager.requestPort: 0
and then restart XDM. Remember that
comments in app-defaults files begin with a !
character, not the usual #. More strict
access controls may be desired. Look at the example
entries in Xaccess, and refer to the
&man.xdm.1; manual page.Replacements for XDMSeveral replacements for the default
XDM program exist. One of them,
KDM (bundled with
KDE) is described later in this
chapter. KDM offers many visual
improvements and cosmetic frills, as well as the
functionality to allow users to choose their window manager
of choice at login time.ValentinoVaschettoContributed by Desktop EnvironmentsThis section describes the different desktop environments
available for X on FreeBSD. A desktop environment
can mean anything ranging from a simple window manager to a
complete suite of desktop applications, such as
KDE or GNOME.
GNOMEAbout GNOMEGNOME is a user-friendly
desktop environment that enables users to easily use and
configure their computers. GNOME
includes a panel (for starting applications and displaying
status), a desktop (where data and applications can be
placed), a set of standard desktop tools and applications, and
a set of conventions that make it easy for applications to
cooperate and be consistent with each other. Users of other
operating systems or environments should feel right at home
using the powerful graphics-driven environment that
GNOME provides.Installing GNOMEThe easiest way to install
GNOME is through the
Desktop Configuration menu during the FreeBSD
installation process as described in Chapter 2. It can also
be easily installed from a package or the ports
collection:To install the GNOME package
from the network, simply type:&prompt.root; pkg_add -r gnomeTo build GNOME from source, use
the ports tree:&prompt.root; cd /usr/ports/x11/gnome
&prompt.root; make install cleanOnce GNOME is installed,
the X server must be told to start
GNOME instead of a default window
manager. If a custom .xinitrc is already in
place, simply replace the line that starts the current window
manager with one that starts
/usr/X11R6/bin/gnome-session instead.
If nothing special has been done to configuration file,
then it is enough to simply type:&prompt.user; echo "/usr/X11R6/bin/gnome-session" > ~/.xinitrcNext, type startx, and the
GNOME desktop environment will be
started.If a display manager, like
XDM, is being used, this will not work.
Instead, create an executable .xsession
file with the same command in it. To do this, edit the file
and replace the existing window manager command with
/usr/X11R6/bin/gnome-session:
&prompt.user; echo "#!/bin/sh" > ~/.xsession
&prompt.user; echo "/usr/X11R6/bin/gnome-session" >> ~/.xsession
&prompt.user; chmod +x ~/.xsessionAnother option is to configure the display manager to
allow choosing the window manager at login time; the section on
KDE2 details
explains how to do this for kdm, the
display manager of KDE.Anti-aliased fonts with GNOMEWhile anti-aliased fonts made their first appearance on
XFree86 desktops in the KDE environment and are supported
there in the standard installation, it is also possible to
use them with gtk applications such as the GNOME
environment. The most straightforward way is probably by
using the libgdkxft library, in
the x11/gdkxft port. After installing this
port, read the
/usr/X11R6/share/doc/gdkxft/README file
carefully.Then, all that is needed is to tell gtk
applications to look for their font-rendering functions in
libgdkxft.so before looking in the
standard place, libgdk.so. This is
easily accomplished by setting an environment variable to
point to the right place; with the Bourne shell
(/bin/sh) or similar shells, type
the command (to start The Gimp,
say)&prompt.user; LD_PRELOAD=/usr/X11R6/lib/libgdkxft.so gimpand with csh and similar shells, type
&prompt.user; setenv LD_PRELOAD /usr/X11R6/lib/libgdkxft.so
&prompt.user; gimpOr, the commands
LD_PRELOAD=/usr/X11R6/lib/libgdkxft.so
export LD_PRELOAD
can be put into .xinitrc,
.xsession or in the appropriate
place(s) in
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xdm/Xsession,
depending on how X is normally started. However, this
short-cut may cause problems if Linux GTK binaries are
run.KDE2About KDE2KDE is an easy to use
contemporary desktop environment. Some of the things that
KDE brings to the user are:A beautiful contemporary desktopA desktop exhibiting complete network transparencyAn integrated help system allowing for convenient,
consistent access to help on the use of the
KDE desktop and its
applicationsConsistent look and feel of all
KDE applicationsStandardized menu and toolbars, keybindings, color-schemes, etc.Internationalization: KDE
is available in more than 40 languagesCentralized consisted dialog driven desktop configurationA great number of useful
KDE applicationsKDE has an office application
suite based on KDE's
KParts technology consisting
of a spread-sheet, a presentation application, an organizer, a
news client and more. KDE also
comes with a web browser called
Konqueror, which represents
a solid competitor to other existing web browsers on Unix
systems. More information on KDE
can be found on the KDE
website.Installing KDE2Just as with GNOME or any
other desktop environment, the easiest way to install
KDE is through the Desktop
Configuration menu during the FreeBSD installation
process as described in Chapter 2. Once again, the software
can be easily installed from a package or from the ports
collection:To install the KDE2 package
from the network, simply type:&prompt.root; pkg_add -r kde2To build KDE from source,
use the ports tree:&prompt.root; cd /usr/ports/x11/kde2
&prompt.root; make install cleanAfter KDE2 has been installed,
the X server must be told to launch this application
instead of the default window manager. This is accomplished
by editing the .xinitrc file:&prompt.user; echo "/usr/local/bin/startkde" > ~/.xinitrcNow, whenever the X Window System is invoked with startx,
KDE2 will be the desktop.If a display manager such as
xdm is being used, the
configuration is slightly different. Edit the
.xsession file instead. Instructions
for kdm are described later in
this chapter.More Details on KDE2Now that KDE2 is installed on
the system, most things can be discovered through the
help pages, or just by pointing and clicking at various menus.
Windows or Mac users will feel quite at home.The best reference for KDE is
the on-line documentation. KDE
comes with its own web browser,
Konqueror, dozens of useful
applications, and extensive documentation. The remainder of
this section discusses the technical items that are
difficult to learn by random exploration.The KDE display managerAn administrator of a multi-user system may wish to have
a graphical login screen to welcome users.
xdm can be
used, as described earlier. However,
KDE includes an
alternative, KDM, which is designed
to look more attractive and include more login-time options.
In particular, users can easily choose (via a menu) which
desktop environment (KDE2,
GNOME, or something else) to run
after logging on.To begin with, run the KDE2
control panel, kcontrol, as
root. It is generally considered
unsafe to run the entire X environment as
root. Instead, run the window manager
as a normal user, open a terminal window (such as
xterm or KDE's
konsole), become root
with su (the user must be in the
wheel
group in /etc/group for this), and then
type kcontrol. Click on the icon on the left marked System, then on
Login manager. On the right there are
various configurable options, which the
KDE manual will explain in greater
detail. Click on sessions on the right.
Click New type to add various window
managers and desktop environments. These are just labels,
so they can say KDE and
GNOME rather than
startkde or
gnome-session.
Include a label failsafe. Play with the other menus as well, they are mainly
cosmetic and self-explanatory. When you are done, click on
Apply at the bottom, and quit the
control center. To make sure kdm understands
what the labels (KDE,
GNOME etc) mean, edit the files used
by xdm.
In KDE 2.2 this has
changed: kdm now uses its own
configuration files. Please see the KDE
2.2 documentation for details.
In a terminal window, as root,
edit the file
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xdm/Xsession. There is
a section in the middle like this:case $# in
1)
case $1 in
failsafe)
exec xterm -geometry 80x24-0-0
;;
esac
esacA few lines need to be added to this section.
Assuming the labels from used were KDE2 and
GNOME,
use the following:case $# in
1)
case $1 in
kde)
exec /usr/local/bin/startkde
;;
GNOME)
exec /usr/X11R6/bin/gnome-session
;;
failsafe)
exec xterm -geometry 80x24-0-0
;;
esac
esacFor the KDE
login-time desktop background to be honored,
the following line needs to be added to
/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/xdm/Xsetup_0:/usr/local/bin/kdmdesktopNow, make sure kdm is listed in
/etc/ttys to be started at the next bootup.
To do this, simply follow the instructions from the previous
section on xdm and replace
references to the /usr/X11R6/bin/xdm
program with /usr/local/bin/kdm.Anti-aliased FontsStarting with version 4.0.2,
XFree86 supports anti-aliasing via
its "RENDER" extension, and starting with version 2.3, Qt (the
toolkit used by KDE) supports this
extension. Configuring this is described in on antialiasing X11 fonts. So, with
up-to-date software, anti-aliasing is possible on a
KDE2 desktop. Just go to the KDE2
menu, go to Preferences -> Look and Feel -> Fonts, and click
on the check box
Use Anti-Aliasing for Fonts and Icons.
For a Qt application which is not part of
KDE, the environment variable QT_XFT
needs to be set to true before starting the program.XFCEAbout XFCEXFCE is a desktop environment
based on the GTK
toolkit used by GNOME, but is much
more lightweight and meant for those who want a simple,
efficient desktop which is nevertheless easy to use and
configure. Visually, it looks very much like
CDE, found on commercial Unix
systems. Some of XFCE's features
are:A simple, easy-to-handle desktopFully configurable via mouse, with drag and
drop, etc Main panel similar to CDE, with menus, applets and
app launchersIntegrated window manager, file manager,
sound manager, GNOME compliance module, and other things Themeable (since it uses GTK) Fast, light and efficient: ideal for
older/slower machines or machines with memory limitations More information on XFCE
can be found on the XFCE
website.Installing XFCEA binary package for xfce
exists (at the time of writing). To install, simply type:&prompt.root; pkg_add -r xfce Alternatively, to build from source, use the ports
collection:&prompt.root; cd /usr/ports/x11-wm/xfce
&prompt.root; make install cleanNow, tell the X server to launch
XFCE the next time X is started.
Simply type this:&prompt.user; echo "/usr/X11R6/bin/startxfce" > ~/.xinitrcThe next time X is started,
XFCE will be the desktop.
As before, if a display manager like
xdm is being used, create an
.xsession, as described in the
section on GNOME, but
with the /usr/X11R6/bin/startxfce
command; or, configure the display manager to allow
choosing a desktop at login time, as explained in
the section on kdm.